JP2018042591A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of executing a proper initial operation.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 capable of performing a game comprises: movable bodies 173 and 175 operably disposed at positions apart from an origin position; drive means 172A to 172D for causing the movable bodies 173 and 175 to move; and control means 120 for controlling the motions of the movable bodies 173 and 175 by the drive means 172A to 172D. The movable bodies 173 and 175 can execute a first motion control for returning the movable bodies 173 and 175 to the origin position, and a second motion control for confirming that the movable bodies 173 and 175 can operate normally. In a second motion control, the control means 120 operates the movable bodies 173 and 175 in a mode according to the mode of the return operation, so that the maximum speed in the return operation control may be a velocity at or lower than the minimum speed in a long initial motion control.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that executes an initial operation control after performing an origin detection operation process (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-076173 A

  However, in the initial operation process, since a certain operation is executed regardless of the mode of the origin detection operation control, there is a case where suitable initial operation control cannot be performed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable initial operation control.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1,1001),
Operable between an origin position (for example, origin position / first retraction position, second retraction position, etc.) and a position away from the origin position (for example, effect position / first effect position, second effect position, etc.) A movable body (for example, movable combination 173, movable combination 175 / first movable combination 300, second movable combination 400, third movable combination 500),
Driving means for operating the movable body (for example, actuators 172A to 172D / first movable accessory driving motor 303, second movable accessory driving motors 411 and 421, third movable accessory driving motor 520);
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the driving means (eg, CPU 120 for effect control);
With
First operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position (for example, control for performing origin return operation / non-detection operation control or detection operation control), and the movable body can operate normally. Second operation control (for example, initial operation A to D (short initial operation control) in the embodiment or long initial operation control / operation control for actual operation confirmation in a modified example) in the embodiment, and an effect by the movable body It is possible to perform third motion control for performing (for example, actual motion control for executing a movable body effect),
In the second operation control, the movable body is operated in a mode corresponding to the operation mode in the first operation control within a range of a first speed and a second speed higher than the first speed. (For example, when performing the long initial operation control or the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control, the CPU 120 for effect control performs the first speed that is the lowest speed (low speed) and the first speed that is faster than the minimum speed. Control is performed so that the movable accessory operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed, as shown in FIGS. 45, when the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation, the initial operation (short initial operation) is not executed, and the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation. If not, the portion that executes the initial operation (short initial operation) / As shown in FIG. 49, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control at the time of detection, the actual operation confirmation process data A is used. When the operation control for confirmation is executed, and when the non-detection operation control is executed, the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed using the process data B for actual operation confirmation)
In the first operation control, control is performed so that the movable body operates at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the effect control CPU 120 The part for executing the short initial operation control at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the long initial operation control (the same speed as the minimum speed in the long initial operation control) / As shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. When the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control is executed, a speed lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in the modified example, the actual operation confirmation operation control). The part that controls the movable accessory to operate at the same speed as the minimum speed of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, suitable second operation control can be executed. Further, in the first operation control, in the first operation control, the movable body operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, and thus can be safely positioned at the origin position.

The gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body (for example, a movable combination 173 and a movable combination 175),
In the first operation control of each of the first movable body and the second movable body, the control means controls the movable body to operate at the first speed in each of the second operation controls. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the effect control CPU 120 executes the short initial operation control at the minimum speed in the long initial operation control),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided so as to be able to occupy the same space when operated from the origin position (for example, as shown in FIGS. 32B and 34B). Thus, both the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are movable to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when the first movable body and the second movable body collide, the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented from being damaged by the impact of the collision. Moreover, the safe operation | movement of each movable body can be ensured with the operation speed according to each movable body.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or means 1,
In the first operation control, the control means controls the movable body to always operate at a single speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the effect control CPU 120 When performing home-return operation control as one operation control, the part that controls the movable accessory to always operate at a single (constant) minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the long initial operation control. As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum set in the actual operation confirmation operation control. (The part that controls the movable accessory to always operate at a single (constant) minimum speed based on the control speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the speed when the movable body is positioned at the origin position can be made constant, and damage to the movable body can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, means 1, and means 2,
In the first operation control, the control means controls the movable body to operate at the first speed in the second operation control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, effect control) When the CPU 120 performs origin return operation control as the first operation control, a part for controlling the movable accessory to operate at the minimum speed in the long initial operation control as the second operation control / FIGS. 50 and 51 As shown in FIG. 4, when the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation control, the movable combination is performed at the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control. Part that controls things to work)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the period of the first operation control can be shortened by selecting the maximum speed at which the movable body can be safely operated without excessively reducing the speed while ensuring the safe operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 3,
Detecting means (for example, a first movable accessory origin detection sensor 316, a second movable accessory origin detection sensor 440A, 440B) capable of detecting that the movable body is located at the origin position;
The control means includes
When the movable body is not detected by the detection means, non-detection operation control is performed as the first operation control. When the movable body is detected by the detection means, the first operation control is performed. (For example, the production control CPU 120 executes origin return operation control when the origin sensor is not in the detection state in the movable accessory initial operation processing of the embodiment, and the origin sensor is in the detection state. In this case, the CPU 120 for partial / effect control that executes the short initial motion control performs the non-detection motion control in S1105 to S1114 when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in S1104 in the movable accessory initial motion processing of the modified example. A unit that executes operation control during detection in S1120 to S1128 when the origin detection sensor is in a detection state in S1104 ),
In the non-detection operation control, the control is performed so that the movable body operates at a speed equal to or lower than the speed at which the movable body is operated in the detection operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses FIGS. As shown in FIG. 50, when the production control CPU 120 executes the return-to-origin operation control as the first operation control, the part for controlling the movable accessory to operate at the minimum speed in the short initial operation control / FIG. 50 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, when the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation control, the movable combination is performed at the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control. Part that controls things to work)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of a defect in the detection means by the first operation control.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 4,
The control means includes
When the movable body is not detected by the detection means when a specific abnormality has occurred, the movable body is controlled to perform an abnormal operation control as the first operation control, and
In the abnormal operation control, control is performed such that the movable body operates at a speed equal to or lower than the speed at which the movable body is operated in the detection operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the second initialization process). If the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S1109, the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 are at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control until the operation error determination count reaches “3”. The part that is controlled to move toward the home position)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movable body can be safely operated even in the abnormal operation control.

A gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 5,
The control means performs control such that the second action control is not performed even when the movable body is detected by the detection means by the abnormal-time action control (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is a movable of the modification example). (If the origin return error of the target accessory is stored in step S1201 in the accessory initial operation process, the process proceeds to S1220 and the actual operation confirmation operation control is not performed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from stopping at a position other than the origin position during the second operation control due to an abnormality.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, 1 to 6,
The movable body has a first movable body and a second movable body (for example, the first movable combination 300 and the second movable combination 400),
The control means performs the first motion control and the second motion control for the first movable body, while only performing the second motion control without performing the first motion control for the second movable body. (For example, if the CPU 120 for effect control determines in step S1102 in the movable action initial operation processing of the modified example that the movable action is not an origin detection target for which origin detection is required, the process proceeds to step S1130. (The part which does not perform operation control at the time of advance non-detection and operation control at the time of detection)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second operation control can be performed only for the necessary movable body, and the operation confirmation time by the second operation control can be shortened.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 7,
The movable body has a first movable body (for example, the first movable combination 300) and a second movable body (for example, the second movable combination 400),
In the first operation control of each of the first movable body and the second movable body, the control means controls the movable body to operate at the first speed in each of the second operation controls. (For example, the production control CPU 120 executes each non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation of each of the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400. The part that controls the movable accessory to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for confirmation),
The speed in the first motion control differs between the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, even if the same control speed is set in the first motion control corresponding to each movable accessory, (If there is a difference in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the accessory, the actual operating speed of each movable accessory is not necessarily the same.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first operation control is performed by selecting the highest speed that can be safely operated without excessively reducing the speed while ensuring the safe operation of each movable body by the operation speed according to each movable body. This period can be shortened.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 8,
When the movable accessory is at the origin position before executing the first operation control (for example, when the origin sensor 171A shown in FIG. 35 or the origin sensor 171B shown in FIG. 36 is on). The second operation control of the movable accessory is performed (for example, the rotation mechanism 173A in the operations (3) and (6) shown in FIG. 42 and the opening / closing mechanism 173B in the operations (4) and (5)). Etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even in the case of a movable accessory at the origin position from the beginning, the operation can be confirmed in the initial operation.

The gaming machine of means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 9,
The movable accessory that has performed the first operation control does not perform the second control operation (for example, the rotation mechanism 173A that performed the operation (2) shown in FIG. 45 and the operation (1) performed). (Opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform initial operation)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the preferred first operation control can be executed by suppressing the time required for the operation check.

The means 11 gaming machine of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 10,
The second operation control (for example, the rotation mechanism 173A in FIG. 44) of the movable accessory that has performed the first operation control (for example, the rotation mechanism 173A or the like that performed the return operation (1) in FIG. 44). (4) and (7), etc.) are performed according to the initial action of other movable accessory (for example, the actions (5) and (6) of the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 44). It is a feature.
According to this feature, a suitable initial operation according to the situation can be executed.

The gaming machine of means 12 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 11,
After confirming the first operation control, the movable agent confirming operation corresponding to the rendering operation (for example, the rotating mechanism 173A, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, and (E.g., a long initial operation of the lifting mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175).
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably confirm the production operation by performing the confirmation operation of the movable accessory.

The gaming machine of means 13 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 12,
The first operation control is performed at timings other than when the power is turned on (for example, when the movable accessory initial operation process of S151 executed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 27 is executed) (for example, shown in FIG. 31). , Which is executed by the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, the timing at which the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014 is executed).
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the rendering operation by performing the return operation other than when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of means 14 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 13,
The first motion control is a mixture of a plurality of motions (for example, the left-side slide motions (2) and (3) shown in FIG. 39 of the slide mechanism 173C controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and FIG. 46). (4) to (6) (left and right direction sliding motions shown in FIG. 46, etc.).
According to this feature, a suitable initial operation can be executed by suppressing the time required for confirming the plurality of operations of the movable accessory.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable accessory initial action process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of a short initial operation and a long initial operation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of operation speed of a short initial operation and a long initial operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial stage operation execution process during a demonstration. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C which operate a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator 172B which operates a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of actuator 172D which operates a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. It is a figure which shows another example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using actuator 172D. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement A of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement B of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement C of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement D of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. It is a figure which shows an example of the coupling | bonding of the initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator 172D. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable accessory initial action process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable accessory initial action process in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the non-detection operation control as a short initial operation in the modification, the operation control for detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation as a long initial operation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control for non-detection as a short initial operation in the modification, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for real operation confirmation as a long initial operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation control for actual operation | movement confirmation in the 1st movable accessory 300 of the modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation control for real operation confirmation in the 2nd movable accessory 400 of the modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation control for real operation confirmation in the 3rd movable accessory 500 of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation control at the time of the detection of the 1st movable combination 300 and the 2nd movable combination 400 of a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the description of each step in the flowchart according to the present embodiment, for example, a portion indicated as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example.

  The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the “winnings”, winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as “starting winning”, and in particular, winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as “first starting prize”. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A or the effect symbol variable display executed in the image display device 5 is displayed. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing the variable display game (described later) is satisfied.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol game (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B and the effect symbol executed in the image display device 5 are displayed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display (described later) is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start prize) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start prize and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variation display of the effect symbol (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the first special figure hold information to be digested is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start prize) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the second start prize and are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) and the variation display of the effect symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd starting win which does not satisfy the 2nd starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting win Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. , When simply referred to as “special figure hold memory number” or “pending memory number”, any one or two of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number It may be pointed to. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”.

  Also, a game that is executed with a variation display of identification information (or a variation display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variation display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variation display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The ordinary symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols, in a variable manner. Note that the variable display game that displays the normal symbols in a variable manner is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  An effect symbol display area is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the effect symbol display area, effect symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. Variation display of decoration identification information (effect design) is also included in the variation display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special figure), a variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols is executed in the display area (effect symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbols are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the effect symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, corresponding to the end of the special figure game, that is, corresponding to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the effect symbols (determined effect symbols, the final effect symbols, which are the final display results) Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (effects symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the effect symbols is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). The finalized design symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  There are, for example, eight types of designs (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, characters, symbols, and character images) The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each effect symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each effect symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and any number may be used (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is out of place can be configured.

  In addition, a stop display that stops and displays the fixed special symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol (also referred to as a special symbol display result), and the finalized stop symbol that is the display result of the variation of the effect symbol (final stop) Stop display to stop the fluctuation display by stopping display of the symbol), and stop display to stop the fluctuation display by stopping the fixed normal symbol which is the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). It should be noted that the change start timing and the change end timing of the effect symbol do not necessarily coincide with the change start timing and the change end timing of the special symbol, and within the change time of the special symbol (special symbol change time) As long as the fluctuation time is within.

  That is, the change start timing of the effect symbol may be later than the change start timing of the special symbol, and the change end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect.

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the effect symbol may be temporarily stopped during the variation display from the start of the effect symbol variation display until the definite effect symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, in the temporary stop display, for example, an effect symbol whose fluctuation speed is “0” is displayed while being stopped while causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA for displaying a special image representing information including active display (displayed at the time of digestion, also referred to as current display) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol executed based on the special figure hold information (Digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame that surrounds the active display, an active display or an active display such as a character or an image displayed around the active display frame, or the like. Information corresponding to the display is displayed by a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A movable accessory 173 and a movable accessory 175 as movable bodies are provided inside the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 perform predetermined operations in the area of the gaming machine frame 3 as production operations. FIG. 1 shows a case where the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are at the origin position. As an effect operation, the movable accessory 173 ascends to the right diagonally upward from the origin position, stops at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as an operation end, and hides a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, the operation of returning to the origin position is performed again. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32 and the like, the movable accessory 173 performs an effect operation that splits into a plurality of parts after moving to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, the movable accessory 175 descends from the origin position as an effect operation, stops at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as an operation end, hides a part of the display screen of the image display device 5, and again returns to the origin. Move back to the position. In addition, the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 may perform an operation of stopping and returning to the origin position again without moving from the origin position to the center of the display screen, which is the operation end, as an effect operation. . The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 may be selectively executed as a staging operation, that is, a strong operation that repeats a violent movement operation and a weak operation that is gentler than the strong operation. Further, when the movable accessory 173 operates, an effect operation of lighting a light emitting member 9CC described later may be performed.

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 175, a light emitting member 9CL and a light emitting member 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member 9U A light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the gaming machine 1 includes other rendering devices such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower unit. May be.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the normal symbol variation display is started (after the regular symbol variation is started), the fixed regular symbol that becomes the variation display result of the regular symbol after a predetermined time as the regular symbol variation time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “out of normal”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the special symbol fluctuation display is started (after the special symbol fluctuation start), when the fluctuation display time as the special figure fluctuation time has passed, the fixed special will be the result of the special symbol fluctuation display. Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ Out of place ". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is the off symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a loss symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or an off symbol.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous for the player a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In addition, after the change display result in the special game becomes “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, and wins a big prize The mouth state (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round and keeps the grand prize opening open, and then closes the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening closed. End the round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  In addition, the grand prize opening is maintained in the closed state instead of the aspect in which the round is started by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state as described above (the aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts (a mode in which the grand prize opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the pachinko machine 1 keeps the grand prize opening closed without opening the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening open. Alternatively, the grand prize opening door may be closed to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, 16) It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is the upper limit number (if the predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening) even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit. May be.

  In the round, the big prize opening is either a predetermined time (opening period) after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the big prize opening occurs. It is maintained in an open state until the period until. The predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the open state in the round is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is maintained closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). There may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round having a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) in which the big prize opening is in an open state (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as a normal open round. A round in which the predetermined time (opening period) for which the big prize opening is in an open state is relatively short (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a value obtained by the player in each jackpot gaming state as a jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big jackpot”, that is, a game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In addition, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not passed since the opening of the grand prize opening door, if the predetermined number of winnings to the big prize opening occurs, the grand prize opening changes from the open state to the closed state. However, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, , Normal state, time-short state, probability change state) and the period (eg, time-short state, probability change state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit game state (for example, the number of time reductions, ST The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times).

  In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of any of the special-game games among the games, the effect symbol variation display is started. In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display state of the effect symbol is a specific variation during the period from when the variation display of the effect symbol is started to when the variable display is ended by the stop display of the confirmed effect symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state refers to an effect symbol that is not yet stopped when the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  In response to the reach state, the rate of change of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9, or the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory It may be included that the operation (stationary, fine movement, movement, etc.) of the object 175 or the like is different from the operation mode before the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in this embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach, which has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach, are preset (prepared).

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability that the jackpot will not be a big hit)} (if the big hit expectation is “1”, the variation display result is always a “big hit”).

  In addition, during the variation display of the effect symbol, as one aspect of the variation display effect, a slip effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the effect symbol or the like can be executed. In the slip effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and then a plurality of effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.). After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” effect symbol display area) of the effect symbol display areas temporarily displayed. 5L and the “right” effect symbol display area 5R, or both), the effect symbol is changed again, and then the effect symbol to change the effect symbol to be stopped is displayed. Thus, in the slip effect, a plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol until the finalized effect symbol that is the variation display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of effect symbols vary. By performing the display again, there are a case where the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the effect symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that either one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is established once, the definite effect that results in the variable display after the variable symbol display is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo continuous chance is a part of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), once again in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting the variation display of all the effect symbols, is predetermined. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous production is the number of times of variation display (initial variation display) until all the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ( 1), the number of re-variation displays (final variation display) after the temporary stop of all the effect symbols at the end (1 time), and the number X of re-variation displays between the initial variation display and the final variation display X ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. Further, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop times) in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The first fluctuation display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-ream, the second fluctuation display (first re-variation display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-ream, The third fluctuation display (second re-variation display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth fluctuation display (third re-variation display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variation display effect, the revariable display (revariation) is performed once to four times, so that the variation of the effect symbol is based on the first start condition or the second start condition being satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In addition, although the present embodiment shows an example in which the re-variation display (re-variation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5), the re-variation display (re-variation) may be performed three or more times.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, before reaching reach in this change (before reaching the reach state), a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the effect symbols in all the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The effect symbols in all the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect or the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display or a message window display may be used. There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect or the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol start changing at the same time, start timing at the same time, or when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol do not start changing at the same time. For the first time the symbol that starts to change is the timing at which the change starts, etc.) and the effect that makes the change start order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol different from the normal time May be executed as In addition, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as the notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be due to an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be due to sound output from the speaker 8, light emission from the lamp 9, operation of the movable accessory 173, etc. (movable body effect).

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that gives a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that the variation display state of the effect ball due to winning of a certain game ball may reach a reach state is that the change display state of the effect symbol due to winning of the game ball is at least What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, a notice effect that informs or suggests to a player that the change display result by winning a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed effect symbol due to winning the game ball is stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the fluctuation display result will be a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special game before starting the fluctuation display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a second hold display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as the target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when it is executed during the target hold information digest process including the target fluctuation display), and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, an effect operation that is a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) to a player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least an effect pattern due to winning of that game ball Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a game operation that is a pre-reading notice effect for notifying (suggesting) a player that a change display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball is at least the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the finalized effect symbol by winning is displayed in a stopped state.

  In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR is prepared. It may be. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , And the like), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect that is acted on or indirectly (holding action effect), or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another This includes an effect to change to the notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) (active display change effect) and an effect to be executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, and activates a character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect), or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and displays characters and the like in the display area of the image display device 5 as active display Includes direct or indirect effects (active display effects) Good. The active display change effect is an effect that changes the special image to the notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is a production that changes. Note that there may be a case where an active display change gaze effect that is an effect mode that is at least partially in common with the active display change effect is executed. Note that an active display change effect or an active display change effect may be executed as a main notice effect such as a step-up notice effect. When the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the target of action changes, but when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the hold effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as a hold effect.

  When the special symbol that becomes the outlier symbol is stopped (derived) as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation symbol display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state after the effect symbol variation display is started. In addition, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect design is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variable display mode when the variation display result is “out of”.

  When a special symbol that becomes an outlier symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state after the effect symbol variation display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined reach-removed combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) that become the jackpot symbols as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round that is controlled when the 8R probability variable big hit is a normally open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is a normal open round jackpot symbol. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normal open round jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the 8R probability variation is a big hit, but the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise accuracy ”)” in which a short-term opening round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the effect symbol is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite effect symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot is the same effect symbol with an odd symbol number on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, After reaching the reach state and executing a predetermined reach effect, the definite effect symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical effect symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ( In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is obtained, the variation display of the effect symbol is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is obtained. After being executed, or without reaching the reach state, the definite effect symbol that becomes the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit may be stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot is a different effect symbol (at least one of the three symbols) on the predetermined effective line formed by the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. (3) “3”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7” ”) Or a combination of performance symbols including a chance symbol or the like (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”,“ 2 ”, where“ accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the definite effect symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a definite effect symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state in which 16 rounds are executed, and after that, the time-varying control (time reduction control) and the probability variable control (probability fluctuation control) are performed. ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variation display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. Probability change control is performed when a special game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the probability change number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the fluctuation display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is performed, the probability variation control is not performed when the special game of the predetermined number of STs (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  In addition, by performing the time reduction control, the special symbol variation display time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state and the variation display result is “big hit” is satisfied first. To finish. Therefore, even if the fluctuation display result does not become “big hit” when the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability change big hit or the 16R probability change big hit, and after that, the predetermined change number of times (for example, 70 times) is made. Is performed, and time reduction control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (the number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of certainty variations) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of certainty variations) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability variation) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation). Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different. In the following description, a big hit gaming state, a state where probability variation control is performed, a state where time reduction control is performed, and the like may be referred to as advantageous states.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variable big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variable big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is performed. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time-shortening control as in the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit.

  In this embodiment, even when the variation display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, when the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of certain variation) is digested. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). In such a mode, as a mode of “big hit”, it is good to provide a normal big hit that is not subjected to probability variation control after the end. For example, when an 8R normal big hit is provided, based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is achieved, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which eight rounds are executed. (Time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control.

  When the time-shortening control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently. Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variation display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for the effect symbol. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily stopping the effect symbol corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, it is changed again in a state where the same effect symbols are aligned. , Any one of the effect symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot and the effect symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot may be finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol.

  In addition, after the definite effect symbol corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next fluctuation display game is In the period until it is started, a round-number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but the same is true when a definite effect symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided. However, after the definite effect design that is a big hit combination corresponding to the normal big win is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the period until the final round ends ( Or, after the end of the final round, during the period until the next variable display game is started, a probability variation promotion effect that informs that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of predetermined identification information such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The effect control board 12 has a function of determining the control content of the movable accessory control device 17. The movable accessory control device 17 performs drive control of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 in accordance with the control content determined by the effect control board 12. The movable accessory control device 17 receives origin detection signals from origin sensors 171A to 171D that detect the origin positions of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175. The movable accessory control device 17 outputs a drive signal for driving the actuators 172A to 172D that drive the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175.

  As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36, the movable accessory 173 has three movable mechanisms: a rotation mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B, and a slide mechanism 173C. The actuator 172A rotates the rotation mechanism 173A to move the movable accessory 173 from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. The origin sensor 171A detects the rotation mechanism 173A and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the rotation direction. The actuator 172B opens and closes the opening / closing mechanism 173B to move the split pieces 173B1 to 173B3 of the movable accessory 173 from the closed state to the open state. The origin sensor 171B detects the opening / closing mechanism 173B, and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the opening / closing direction. Further, the actuator 172C moves the slide mechanism 173C laterally to move the movable accessory 173 from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the left and right. The origin sensor 171C detects the slide mechanism 173C, and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the lateral movement direction. That is, the movable accessory 173 performs a plurality of operations by the plurality of actuators 172A to 172C.

  By the way, the movable accessory 173 has three movable mechanisms, that is, a rotation mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B, and a slide mechanism 173C, and the CPU 120 for effect control is independent of each movable mechanism as an individual movable accessory. Can be controlled. In the present embodiment, the “movable accessory” as the movable body refers to a combination of a plurality of movable mechanisms such as the movable accessory 173 and also refers to each movable mechanism. For example, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B will be described as separate movable accessories.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the movable accessory 175 is moved in the vertical direction from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the actuator 172D. The origin sensor 171D detects that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as an effect symbol that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “out of”, “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, and the big hit type Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a confirmed effect symbol (final stop symbol) in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates execution of a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery designation command is a command for causing the gaming machine 1 to execute a power failure recovery process after power supply is resumed from the power failure state. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes power failure recovery processing. The effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, an initial operation of the effect device as the power failure recovery process. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, a power failure recovery screen may be displayed on the image display device 5 for notifying the player that the power has recovered from the power failure. In addition, as an initial operation of the rendering device, an origin return operation for returning the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 to the origin position and an initial operation for confirming the operation of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 may be performed. . Moreover, you may make it perform the test lighting of the lamp | ramp 9, the output of the monitor sound from the speaker 8, etc. as an initial operation of a production | presentation apparatus.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set in accordance with the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying that specifies whether a start winning is made at the first starting winning opening or a starting winning is made at the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of the production symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more effect symbols categorized into a common group.

  The command E0XXH is an initialization designation command that designates initialization. Receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (second operation control) according to the EXT data XX (hexadecimal number) of the initialization designation command. For example, in the EXT data, the initial operation of the image display device 5, the movable accessory 173, or the rendering device of the movable accessory 175 can be designated. In this embodiment, the initialization designation command is transmitted to the sub-board in the initialization process of S71 that is executed once when the power is turned on in the main process of the CPU 103 described later with reference to FIG. However, the initialization designation command may be transmitted at another timing.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 16A), when the start winning occurs, the fluctuation display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. If it is determined as “big hit”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category (based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category) is determined. Fluctuation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variation display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the big hit type. The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  Note that the effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the change display result notification command are sent by the effect control CPU 120 to one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, movable accessory 173, and movable accessory). Used to control the object 175). Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the processing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern of the effect design will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” is referred to as “out-of-range variation pattern”. The deviation variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach deviation variation pattern” and “non-reach variation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” among the cases where the variation display result is “out of”. “Reach fluctuation pattern” (also referred to as “reach fluctuation pattern”) or “reach fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “out of”. Pattern "))".

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (outlier) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (outlier) variation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (outlier) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (displacement) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (outlier) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super-reach α (out of line) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas.

  The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super-reach α (out-of-range) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (production) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (displacement) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super-reach β (out of line) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super-reach β (displacement) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (outlier) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, the variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “PC3” for the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) are provided. May be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (accuracy) fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A. In order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit) based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result before the game is executed. It is a table that is referred to. In addition, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation display result is referred to as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) ”And“ out of ”special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state is set. Value) is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “out of place”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. Specifically, in the low-accuracy state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (a value in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of decision values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes high.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50) determined values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determined values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than the first special figure, so that the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (clash accuracy) is not provided, but in the case of providing the 2R probability variation big hit (crash accuracy), in the case of the second special figure game, compared to the case of the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (probable variation count) and the short time count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  A movable accessory control device 17 is connected to the effect control board 12. The movable accessory control device 17 controls the operations of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 in accordance with instructions from the effect control CPU 120. As described above, the movable agent control device 17 is connected to the origin sensors 171A to 171D that detect the origin positions of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175. In addition, the movable combination control device 17 is connected to the movable combination 173 and actuators 172A to 172D that drive the movable combination 175. As the origin sensor, a contact type sensor such as a micro switch, or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor can be used.

  The origin sensors 171A to 171D are sensors that detect that the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position and output a detection signal. The origin sensors 171A to 171D change the detection signal from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state when the movable combination is detected. In this embodiment, the origin sensors 171A to 171D will be described as detecting digital (ON / OFF) signals, but the origin sensors 171A to 171D may output analog values, for example. For example, a resolver or a rotary encoder attached to a laser sensor or a motor may be used to output an analog value.

  The movable accessory control device 17 can control the outputs to the actuators 172A to 172D based on the detection signals input from the origin sensors 171A to 171D. The movable accessory control device 17 performs control so that the origin sensor 171A to 171D moves the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 from the position where the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is detected to the operation end of each actuator. can do. For example, the movable accessory controller 17 operates the actuator 172A when the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in an ON state, and moves the movable accessory 173 to an operation end that is locked by a mechanical stopper (not shown). be able to. Further, when the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in the off state, the movable accessory control apparatus 17 can move the actuator 172A to the origin position where the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in the on state.

  The actuators 172A to 172D are, for example, a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid, or the like. When the actuators 172A to 172D are motors, the movable accessory control device 17 may have a function of a motor driver. When the actuators 172A to 172D are electromagnetic solenoids, the movable accessory control device 17 may have a function of supplying a voltage for operating the electromagnetic solenoids.

  In this embodiment, the case where the origin sensors 171A to 171D are arranged in order to detect the position of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is illustrated. However, for example, the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is provided. You may make it arrange | position the sensor which detects that it exists in an operation | movement end. Moreover, although the case where there are four actuators 172A to 172D is illustrated, the number of actuators is not limited to this. Details of the operation of the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, the ROM 121 has any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the first hold display displayed in the first start-winning storage display area 5HL as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. The 1st hold | maintenance display mode determination table referred in order to determine may be memorize | stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first hold display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. . Each first hold display mode determination table includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the second hold display displayed in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display is displayed. A second hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not may be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, as a table relating to execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display, whether the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is changed to another display mode. In order to determine which display mode to change to the first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode. A first hold change mode determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination ratios that change to another display mode and no change to another display mode, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. Each first pending change presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether there is a change or not. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display after the change is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables, one large first hold change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first hold change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change mode determination tables, one large first hold change mode determination table including information of all the first hold change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the ROM 121 changes the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR as another table as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display. To determine whether to change to a second pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode, or to change to another display mode The 2nd pending | holding change aspect determination table referred to may be memorize | stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing such as the number of changes to be executed later). May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good. Similarly, the ROM 121 has a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). It may be stored.

  Note that a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table is a ROM 121. May be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table related to the holding action effect to be applied indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding action effect, when it is determined that the holding effect effect is to be executed, the holding effect effect mode referred to in order to determine which effect mode among the plurality of effect modes is determined. The determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect mode determination tables may be stored, which are different from each other in the type of hold action effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold action effect mode determination table. In each hold action effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold action effect may be assigned to each of the effect modes.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or second hold display). Alternatively, a table for determining whether or not to execute the holding action gaze effect may be stored as a table relating to the holding action gaze effect that is applied indirectly or indirectly. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action / gase effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the holding action gaze effect, the holding action that is referred to in order to determine which of the plurality of presentation modes is determined when it is determined to execute the holding action gasse effect. A gasse effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, even if a plurality of hold action gaze effect mode determination tables are stored that are different from each other in the types of hold action gaze effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold action gaze effect mode determination table. Good. In each hold action gaze effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold action gaze effect may be assigned to each of the effect modes. .

  When executing an active display change effect that changes a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 is referred to as a table related to the active display change effect to determine whether to execute the active display change effect. The active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to determine which of the plurality of effects is selected. The change effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, even if a plurality of active display change effect mode determination tables that store different types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect mode determination table and their respective determination ratios are stored. Good. In each active display change effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect may be assigned to each of the effect modes. .

  In addition, in the ROM 121, the CPU 120 for effect control is used for controlling effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, and the movable accessory 175). Data constituting a plurality of effect control patterns is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as effect symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of change patterns, and the effects in the period from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the definite special symbol that is the special figure display result is derived and displayed. Various display operations such as design variation display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various design operations that do not involve production design variation display (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and an end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 120. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, data indicating the change mode of each effect symbol during the change display of the effect symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with the production symbol variation display operation during the production symbol variation display. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit.

  The movable accessory control data is data for designating the rendering operation of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175. The production control CPU 120 controls the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 so as to perform a production operation with a predetermined operation pattern via the movable combination control device 17 based on the movable combination control data. The movable combination control data includes at least one operation pattern of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175. However, the movable combination control data may include a plurality of operation patterns of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175. For example, the movable combination control data may include an operation pattern in which the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 operates strongly and an operation pattern in which the movable combination 175 operates weakly. The strong motion is, for example, an operation pattern in which the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 operates large or for a long time in the movable range. On the other hand, the weak operation is an operation pattern in which the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 operates in a movable range smaller or in a shorter time than the strong operation. In the case where a plurality of movement patterns of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are included in the movable combination control data, the effect control CPU 120 may select and execute the operation pattern according to the production conditions. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may select a strong motion pattern during a super reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a big hit effect, and the like, and may select a weak motion pattern during a normal reach. The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 operate in a plurality of operation patterns, so that the interest can be improved.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  The effect control pattern may include control data for controlling the initial operation of the effect device. As described above, the initial operation of the effect device is, for example, an operation executed to confirm the operation of the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, or the movable accessory 175. is there. The effect control CPU 120 causes the effect device to initially operate in a predetermined operation pattern by executing an effect control pattern including an operation pattern of an initial operation of the effect device. That is, initial operation control (second operation control) for confirming that the movable body can operate normally can be executed. The plurality of operation patterns of the initial operation can be realized by preparing a plurality of effect control patterns for executing the initial operation and selecting a predetermined effect control pattern from the plurality of effect control patterns. . The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be designated based on the EXT data XX of the initialization designation command E0XXH, for example. The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be selected based on a predetermined condition by the effect control CPU 120 that has received the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the effect design process is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed in which the operation content is determined by receiving an operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the operation effective period, which is an operation effective period. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to operate the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 in a manner specified by the movable combination control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the change display of the effect symbol An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during the display of the effect symbol variation (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state or a period in which the ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, Control of the movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, etc.) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value that is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, the data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10 (B) are deleted one by one every time the change display of the effect symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when the variation display of the effect symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number is provided. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notifying command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10 (C) are deleted one by one every time the production symbol variation display is started in synchronization with the second special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when the variation display of the production symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when the change display of the effect symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effects related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the received command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning prize in FIG. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. In addition, due to the start of the change display of the production symbol, etc., the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10 (E) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Also, due to the start of variable display of effect symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  First, the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 100.

  In FIG. 11, when the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The CPU 103) starts a main process after S001 after executing a security check process which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S001). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S002), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S003). Then, the RAM 102 is set to an accessible state (S005). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch input via the input port of the I / O 105 is in an on state (S006). The clear switch is mounted on a power supply board, for example. When the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is on (S007; YES), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing (S010 to S014).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is not in the on state (S007; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the power supply stop process has been performed (S008). The processing at the time of power supply stop means the state of the gaming machine 1 to restore the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the internal state of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Data protection processing for temporarily backing up the data. Data backup is performed, for example, by storing data to be protected in a storage area (backup RAM area) of the RAM 102 to which power is supplied from a backup power source. Data backup may be performed by saving data in the backup RAM area when it is detected that power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area can be determined, for example, by the presence or absence of a backup flag that is set when data is backed up. Further, the determination can be made based on whether or not parity data is added to the backup RAM area.

  When it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed (S008; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from S010.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power supply stop process has been performed (S008; YES), the CPU 103 performs a parity check on the backup data stored in the backup RAM area, and whether the check result is OK. Is determined (S009). In the process of S009, the checksum calculated from the data stored in the RAM 102 when the power supply is stopped is compared with the checksum calculated and stored from the data backed up during the power supply stop process. The check result is determined by the match. If the power supply stop process is correctly performed, the checksum stored in the backup RAM area matches the checksum calculated from the data stored in the backup RAM area after the power supply is started. On the other hand, if the power supply stop process is not performed correctly, the two checksums do not match. The fact that the parity check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped. When the parity check result is not OK (S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing that is executed when the power is turned on, which is not recovery by the power supply stop processing (S010 to S014).

  On the other hand, when the parity check result is OK (S009; YES), the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (the processes of S41 to S44) for returning the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 to the state when the power supply is stopped.

  In S41, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (S41), and sequentially sets the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (S42). . The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of S41 and S42, the stored data remains as it is in the portion of the work area that is not initialized. The part that is not initialized includes, for example, data indicating a gaming state at the time of stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  After executing the processing of S42, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (S43), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup command transmission table in the work area (area in the RAM 102). To enable transmission of commands stored in the backup command transmission table.

  After executing the process of S43, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (9200H) as an initialization designation command at the time of power supply restoration (S44). The CPU 103 may transmit the data backed up in the backup RAM area together with a power failure recovery designation command. Examples of the command to be transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command include the variable display result command (8CXXH), the symbol confirmation command (8F00), the game state designation command (95XX), the hit start designation command (A0XX), which are described in FIG. These are a notification of opening a prize opening (A1XX), a notification after opening a big prize opening (A2XX), a command for specifying the number of time reductions (B3XX), a command for specifying the number of times of variation (B4XX), and the like. By transmitting these commands together with the power failure recovery designation command, it is possible to recover the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process may include an initial operation of the rendering device.

  After executing the process of S44, the CPU 103 executes the process of S015.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the clear switch is in the on state (S007; YES), it is determined in the process of S008 that the power supply stop process is not performed (S008; NO), or the parity is determined in the process of S009. When it is determined that the check result is not OK (S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from S010.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (S010). The data stored in the RAM 102 is initialized by the RAM clear process. The data to be initialized is, for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for determining per symbol. Data initialization sets the data value to 0, but a predetermined initial value may be set as the data, for example. Also, initialization is performed on the entire storage area of the RAM 102. However, only a predetermined storage area of the RAM 102 may be initialized. The area not initialized may be, for example, an area in which data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determination per ordinary symbol is stored.

  After executing the processing of S010, the CPU 103 sets the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (S011), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table as initial values of the work area. (S012).

  By the processing of S011 and S012, for example, initial values are set for a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 set in the game control flag setting unit 152. . In addition, initial values are set for various timers set in the game control timer setting unit 153 and used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. In addition, an initial value is set for a counter for counting a count value that is set for the game control counter setting unit 154 and is used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, initial values are set for various buffers that are set in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1.

  After executing the processing of S012, the CPU 103 sets the address of the initialization command transmission table in the pointer (S013), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization command transmission table in the work area (area in the RAM 102). The command stored in the command transmission table at initialization can be transmitted.

  After executing the processing of S013, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted) such as the effect control board 12 (game control microcomputer 100). Notifies the sub-board that the initialization process has been executed, and the sub-board transmits a command specifying that the initialization process is to be executed to the sub-board (S014). The CPU 103 may designate a target for executing the initialization process in the EXT data of the initialization designation command. For example, CPU 103 may specify an effect control pattern for selecting an initial operation of the effect device in the EXT data. Further, the CPU 103 may directly designate the initial operation of the effect device such as the image display device 5 or the movable accessory 173 in the EXT data. When receiving the initialization designation command, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the initial operation of the presentation device based on the initialization designation command.

  After executing the process of S014 or after executing the process of S44, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (S015). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update a random value within a predetermined range of random numbers.

  Further, in S015, the CPU 103 sets a game control timer register so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a CTC (counter / timer circuit). As the game control timer, a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 can be used.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S010 to S016) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the initial value random number update process (S018) and the display random number update process (S019) in the main process. When the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, an interrupt prohibition process is executed (S017), and an interrupt process by the game control timer is prohibited. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, an interrupt permission process is executed (S020), and the interrupt disabled state is released.

  In the present embodiment, the display random number for which the update process is executed in S019 is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or whether to reach when it is not a big hit. It is a random number for. In the display random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated.

  The initial value random number for which update processing is executed in S018 is a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the initial value of. In the initial value random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.

  Above, description of the main process using FIG. 11 is complete | finished.

  Next, the game control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a game control timer interrupt process.

  When the CPU 103 receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are possible. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to enable transmission of the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  This is the end of the description of the game control timer interrupt process using FIG.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in S101 of the special symbol process (S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process executed in S208 and S211 of the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in S220 of the start winning process (S208, S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 14, first, the CPU 103 is based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Then, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (S201). At this time, if the first start opening switch 22A is in the ON state (S201; YES), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit storage number). (4)) is determined (S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (S207). .

  When the first start-up switch 22A is off in S201 (S201; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in S202 (S202; YES), the process of S209 Is executed, the second start port switch 22B is turned on based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not there is (S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (S203; YES), the second special figure holding memory number (the second special figure game holding number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). (4)) is determined (S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in S204 (S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” (S210). .

  After executing the process of S207, the start winning process (FIG. 15) is executed (S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (S209), and the process proceeds to S203. After the process of S210 is executed, a start winning process (FIG. 15) is executed (S211), the value stored in the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (S212), and the start winning determination process is terminated. . Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  As the start winning process shown in FIG. 14 (S208, S211), the CPU 103 updates the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, by one (S215). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the process of S215, the total pending storage number is updated to be incremented by 1 (S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of S216, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determining The numerical data indicating the random value MR2 and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (S217). The numeric data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is obtained from the main board 11 by executing the command control process (S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (S221). The reserved memory count notification command set in this way is obtained from the main board 11 by executing the command control process (S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  As the winning random number determination process (S220) shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 checks the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, and thereby the current game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A state is specified (S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, for example, by confirming the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state, for example, when the probability variation flag is in the on state, depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state or the off state. If the probability variation flag is in the off state, the low probability state is identified. In other words, the CPU 103 specifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing of S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (S403). . In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of S402 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each value as the random value MR1. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, it is determined that the variation display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined as “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  When it is determined in S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result in the process of S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (S410).

  When it is determined in S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (S403; NO), or after any of the processes of S410 is executed, the variation category is determined (S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of S412, the CPU 103 causes the plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, different determination ratios, and the like) to each other. ) To select one of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 is a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of S403, etc.) or a reserved memory number (for example, a stored value of a first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variable category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected based on the first reserved storage number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variable category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 18A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 18B is a configuration example of the variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 18C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 18D is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 18A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 18B to 18D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 17 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  FIG. 18A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (a variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B), a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, among 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3, 0 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 18C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determination values of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 18C, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category. “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the special figure display result is “out of”, when the number of reserved memories is large, the shortened / non-reach ( The determination ratio of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “out of” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > The determination rate “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “out of” and the number of stored storages is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “out of” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the special figure display result is “out of”, the super-reach (out of) variation category (the out-of-range) can be changed regardless of whether the number of reserved storage is large or small. The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the change display corresponding to the start winning prize, and the interest in the game can be improved. In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 16B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of S412 (S413). The winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101 of FIG. 13, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Run.

  The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” is determined (prior determination) before the variation display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result notification command The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special diagram process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process in S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category stored in S218 of the start winning process as in S412 of the random value determination process of winning. Subsequently, based on the variation category as the determination result, one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, and stored in the variation pattern setting process of S111. The variation pattern may be determined using the random number MR5 for variation pattern determination stored in the processing.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted by 1 or added by 1, It is a first special figure game (special game using the first special figure) by the special symbol display device 4A, or a second special figure game (special drawing using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether it is a game. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of S112 may be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special game or the second special game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting from the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state. If the jackpot flag is in an on state, the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. Updated to When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the like, for example, a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “16R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type “16R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening of the winning prize opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, the normal open big hit state may be set. On the other hand, corresponding to the jackpot type “8R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “8 times” so that the normal open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, and the movable accessory 175. Processing to wait until the waiting time corresponding to the period to be passed, and after-hit gaming state transition processing to be described later for setting to start probability variation control and time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc. It is included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in S110 of the special symbol process (S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of S231, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in S231 (S231; NO), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold data corresponding to the hold number “1”. Then, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Following the processing of S232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory unit In 151B, the hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry. (S233). In the process of S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in S231 (S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Good.

  As described above, since the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the second special figure hold storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure game Is held, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than “0” in S235 (S235; NO), as the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A Then, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory unit is updated. In 151A, the hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry. (S237). Further, in the process of S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (S238).

  After performing either of the processes of S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the special symbol fluctuation display result, is “big hit” or “out of line”, FIG. Similar to the process of S402 of the winning random number determination process (S220) shown in (A), the data of the display result determination table is set (S239). When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, the start port buffer value is used in the process of S402. ("1" or "2") is referred to, but in the process of S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value ("1" or "2") may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determined values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “out of line”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “out of place” (S240).

  After the special figure display result is determined in S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (S241). And when it determines with it being a "hit" (S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “16R probability variable jackpot” and “8R probability variable jackpot”. Depending on which of the decision values assigned to the jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the plurality of types is the jackpot type (S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S245), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, the big hit type buffer value may be “1” if the big hit type is “16R probability variable big hit”, and “2” if the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit”.

  When it is determined in S241 that it is not “big hit” (S241; NO) or after executing the processing of S245, the result of the prior determination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and further, the big hit gaming state In accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of, a confirmed special symbol is set (S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S249), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (S235; YES), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S250), the special symbol normal process is performed. finish. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of S111 following the special symbol normal process of S110, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern setting process (S111), the variation category is determined in the same manner as the winning random number determination process (S220). However, when the winning random number determination process (S220) is executed, the variation pattern setting process (S111) is performed. ), The random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is used in the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. For example, if “99”, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 20A is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach)” among the above eight types. FIG. 20B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (out))” among the above eight types. FIG. 20C is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (out))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 20D to 20H.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in S113 of the special symbol process (S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (S291). If the big hit flag is on (S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start time effect waiting time (S292). For example, in the process of S292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing of S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (S293). For example, in the process of S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in S291 (S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process at the time of variation (S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the gaming state transition process at the time of change executed in S296 of the special symbol stop process (S113) shown in FIG. In the changing gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low-probability low-base state (S451). CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. If it is determined in S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the changing gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S451 that the low-probability / low-base state is not established (S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (S452). The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of times of execution of the special figure game for executing the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The ST number (probability variation number) and the time reduction number are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 13 and 23).

  Subsequent to the processing of S452, the CPU 103 reads the ST number (probability variation number) (S453) and reads the time reduction number (S454). Subsequent to the processing of S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. In S455, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a highly probable state (S455; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count) read in S453 (for example, 70 times) is determined (S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) (S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. The gaming state is set to a low-probability state, for example, by turning it off (S457), and the probability variation control is terminated.

  After executing the process of S457, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not a high-probability state (S455; NO), or the value of the variation counter is not greater than the value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count). If it is determined (S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (time-short state) (S458). When the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time reduction state). If it is determined in S458 that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the short time read in S454 (for example, It is determined whether the value is greater than (70 times) (S459). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and puts it in the off state. Thus, the gaming state is set to the low base state (S460), and the time-shortening control is terminated.

  After the processing of S460, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (S458; NO), or the value of the fluctuation number counter is determined by the short time number and determined not to be larger than the value. If it is (S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state has become a low probability low base state (S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in S461 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to “0” (S462). It is cleared to “0” (S463), the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (S464), and the gaming state transition process at variation ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S461 that the low probability low base state is not reached (S461; NO), the changing game state transition process is terminated without executing S462, S463, and S464.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in S117 of the special symbol process (S15) shown in FIG. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot ending presentation waiting time has elapsed (S311). As an example, in the post-hit opening post-processing (S116) shown in FIG. Is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the waiting time at the end of jackpot has elapsed.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in S311 (S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in S311 (S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high probability state (probability change state) (S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state, for example, and sets it to the high base state (S315). That is, by the processing of S314 and S315, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to the high-accuracy base state.

  Following the processing of S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (S316), and sets the number of time reductions to 70 times (S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to “0” (S318) and ends the jackpot ending process.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) and the setting value of 70 time reductions are set to the same value (both 70 times), but the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) and the time reduction are set. The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. Further, in this embodiment, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot and the setting value of ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 (S219). ), Transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in S403 or the like is performed (S410), and the variable category command according to the variation category determined in S412 is transmitted. Transmission setting (S413) is performed, and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (S221). After these processes are executed, the command control process (S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is executed, so that the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) is played. When the ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, fluctuation Four commands, that is, a category command and a pending storage count notification command (a first pending storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing of S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variation display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like is displayed. In the variation pattern setting process of S111, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern setting process of S111, a variation display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the representation symbol determined as described above, etc. Transmission settings for transmission to the control board 12 are performed. After these processes are executed, when the variable display is started by executing the command control process (S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Pattern designation commands and the like are transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  Note that the commands are not limited to being transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process of S17 for each timer interrupt.

  In other words, at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol is started, is the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) controlled as the “hit” in the special symbol normal processing (S110)? In the variation pattern setting process (S111), a specific variation display mode (variation pattern) of the effect symbol is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are effect control. It is transmitted to the substrate 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number determination process (S220) makes a big hit as “big hit” The determination as to whether or not the game state is controlled, the determination of a rough variation display mode (variation category) of the effect symbol, and the like are performed, and the contents determined by the respective effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control board 12. The

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability change big hit, 16R probability change big hit), in the big hit end processing of S117, the ST number (number of probability change) and the number of time reductions are both 70 times. Set to In addition, the variation counter is counted up in each variation when the gaming state is a high-probability base state (S452), and the gaming state becomes a low-probability state when the variation counter exceeds the ST number (probability variation number). It is set (S457), and the gaming state is set to the low base when the fluctuation number counter exceeds the number of time reductions (S460).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S71). At the initialization station, the production control CPU 120 confirms reception of the initialization designation command from the main board 11 described with reference to FIG. 11, and initializes the presentation device based on the initialization designation command. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, the image display device 5 performs an initial screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  After executing the processing of S71, the effect control CPU 120 performs clearing of the RAM 122, setting of various initial values, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12, and the like. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in an off state (S72; NO), the process of S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in S72 (S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (S73), and command analysis processing is executed (S74). In the command analysis process executed in S74, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read out and then read out. Settings and control corresponding to the effect control command made are performed.

  After the command analysis process is executed in S74, an effect control process process is executed (S75). In the effect control process of S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, a movable accessory 173, and a drive operation of the movable accessory 175. The control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices is determined, determined, set, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process of S75, an effect random number update process is executed (S76), and the random numbers for effect counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are shown as various random values used for effect control. Numeric data is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to S72.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (S501). At this time, if there is no received command (S501; NO), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a received command in S501 (S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening prize designation command (S502). ). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (S502; YES), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (S503). For example, in the processing of S503, if a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 Good.

  If the received command is not the first start opening prize designation command in S502 (S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second start opening prize designation command (S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (S504; YES), a second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S505). For example, in the processing of S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command in S504 (S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in S507 (S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (S508). If the command is the first pending storage count notification command (S508; YES), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (S509).

  If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command in S508 (S508; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (S510; YES), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (S511).

  When the received command is a symbol designating command at S506 (S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command (S507; YES), or at any of the processes of S503, S505, S509, and S511 When the first pending storage number notification wait time is set in the processing of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command after the execution of the received command, the received command is received at the first start winning prize received command. After storing at the head of the empty area in the buffer 194A (S512), the process returns to S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designating command at S506 (S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at S507 (S507; YES), or the processing of S503, S505, S509, and S511 is performed. After executing any of the above, when the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is set to the second start winning prize. After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194B (S512), the process returns to S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  When it is determined in S510 that the received command is not the second reserved memory number notification command (S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command (S513). ). When it is determined that it is a variation pattern designation command (S513; YES), the production control CPU 120 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (S514). After executing the process of S514, the effect control CPU 120 returns to S501 and executes the process.

  If it is determined in S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is an initialization designation command (S515). If it is determined that the command is an initialization designation command (S515; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stores the initialization designation command in an initialization designation command storage area formed in the RAM (S516). After executing the process of S516, the CPU 120 for effect control returns to S501 and executes the process.

  If it is determined in S515 that the received command is not an initialization designation command (S515; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to the other received commands (S517). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may identify the current gaming state by analyzing the gaming state designation command. When the received command is a hit end designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the hit end designation command and specify whether or not the time is short. When the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may store the power failure recovery designation command in a power failure restoration designation command storage area formed in the RAM. After executing the process of S517, the CPU 120 for effect control returns to S501 and executes the process.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When receiving commands are sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  Above, description of command analysis processing using FIG. 25 is complete | finished.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process executed in S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). , A process for determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command is received as a received command, and a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additionally displaying in the start winning memory display area 5H are determined. The process to perform is performed.

  After performing the winning effect determination process in S150, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable accessory initial operation process (S151). Details of the movable accessory initial operation process of S151 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After performing the movable accessory initial operation process of S151, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, one of the following processes of S170 to 177 is selected. And run.

  The variation display start waiting process in S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. This variation display start waiting process is based on whether the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variation display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes a process for determining whether or not to start the display of the effect symbol on the display device 5 and a process for displaying a process for executing a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display). When it is determined to start the variation display of the effect symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variation display start setting process corresponds to the fact that the variation display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Active to shift the first hold display or the second hold display, to determine the definite display design according to the change pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. Including a process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a process for determining various effects (for example, main notice effect), and the like. Yes. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variation display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variation display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the change display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect controls (for example, effect symbol variation display control during effect symbol variation display) are performed. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the read control data (process data) and outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and displays it on the screen. Control to output to the substrate 13 and output the production sound from the speaker 8, control to output the illumination signal to the lamp control substrate 14 to turn on / off / flash the lamp 9, driving of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 Various production control such as control is executed.

  After performing such effect control, it corresponds to, for example, that an end code indicating the end of variation display of the effect symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or that a symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized design symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variation display result of the production symbol, is completely stopped and displayed. If the finalized design is displayed in full stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if it does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 11, the effect display board can autonomously derive and display the determined effect symbol to determine the change display result. When the confirmed effect symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This waiting process per special figure includes a process of counting the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions, a process of updating the value of the production number counter, and a process of changing the gaming state according to the value of the production number counter. Can include. In this special symbol waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to “4” when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, and the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol. In this case, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit start process of S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot start process is executed before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, and a fanfare effect is performed, or an effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened) (for example, This includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This in-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) For example, an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, or the like) is set. It includes processing to do. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-round process in S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. When a special winning opening releasing notification command is received from the main board 11, an effect to be executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The effect process flag value is updated to “5”. When a hit end designation command is received from the main board 11, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7”.

  The post-hit end processing in S177 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This post-hit processing is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the processing for executing the ending effect, the processing for setting the gaming state, the ST number (the number of times of probability change), and the number of time reductions are set. Processing to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the movable accessory initial operation process of S151 in the effect control process (S75) of FIG. 26 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the movable accessory initial operation process.

  27, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the initialization designation command storage area or the power failure recovery command storage area formed in the RAM 122, and stores the initialization designation command or the power failure restoration designation command. It is determined whether or not (S1511). The initialization designation command is a command stored in the initialization designation command storage area in S516 shown in FIG. 25, and the power failure recovery designation command is a command stored in the power failure restoration designation command storage area in S517 described in FIG. It is. When the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is not stored (S1511; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the movable accessory initialization process.

  On the other hand, when the initialization designation command or the power failure restoration designation command is stored (S1511; Y), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171A is in the ON state (S1512). The origin sensor 171A is a sensor that detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the rotation direction.

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is on (S1512; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is on (S1513). The origin sensor 171B is a sensor that detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the opening / closing direction.

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (S1513; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation A for executing the initial operation A, and proceeds to S1519 (S1514). ). That is, the initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (S1513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation B for executing the initial operation B, and proceeds to S1519. (S1514). That is, the initial operation B is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is on and the origin sensor 171B is off.

  In the process of S1512, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is not in the on state (S1512; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (S1516).

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (S1516; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation C for executing the initial operation C, and proceeds to S1519 (S1517). ). That is, the initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is in an off state and the origin sensor 171B is in an on state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (S1513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation D for executing the initial operation D, and proceeds to S1519. (S1518). That is, the initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are off.

  After executing the processing of S1514, S1515, S1517, or S1518, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation speed to the minimum speed in the long initial operation described later (S1519), and starts the timer count of the initial operation process timer (S1520). ).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 drives each actuator (actuators 172A to 172D) in accordance with the initial operation process data set in S1514, S1515, S1517, or S1518 (S1521), and the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175. Is operated at the minimum speed in the long initial operation set in S1519. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process data set in S1514, S1515, S1517, or S1518 has been completed (S1522). If the process data is not completed, the process returns to S1521, and each actuator is driven according to the initial operation process data set in S1514, S1515, S1517, or S1518, and the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are returned in S1519. Operates at the minimum speed in the set long initial operation.

  In this manner, the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are operated at the minimum speed in the long initial operation until the initial operation process data set in S1514, S1515, S1517, or S1518 is completed. If it is determined in S1522 that the process data has been completed (S1522; YES), the movable accessory initialization operation process is terminated.

  Here, the operation modes and control contents of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 by executing the movable combination initialization operation process shown in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing the operation modes of the initial operations A to D (short initial operation) and the long initial operation performed by the CPU 120 for effect control. 29A is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the long initial operation, and FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the short initial operation. In FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the reciprocating distances of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are not the same, but will be described using the same conceptual diagram for convenience of explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 can reciprocate between the origin position and the rotation end and the slide end, which are the production positions of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175, respectively. The forward movement from the origin position to the rotation end or slide end and the return movement from the rotation end or slide end to the origin position are actual operations that are actually performed in the various effects described above. . In addition, although the reciprocating movement distance (rotation range) of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 is not the same, it demonstrates using the same conceptual diagram for convenience of explanation.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs initial operations A to D as short initial operations (including long initial operations) according to the combination of the state of the origin sensor 171A and the state of the origin sensor 171B when the movable accessory initialization operation process is executed. The second operation control (short initial operation control, long initial operation control) for performing any of the above is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the movable accessory initialization operation process, and if the detected part of the movable accessory is not detected by the origin sensor, that is, the movable accessory is detected for some reason (for example, transportation or amusement island) If the actuator has moved from the origin position at the time of installation, or if the origin return could not be performed during the previous operation (for example, when performing the production, the origin return of the movable accessory can be confirmed due to motor step-out, failure, catching, etc. If there is an accessory error (operation error) such as failure or inability to operate), or if the machine has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine, etc.) (for example, origin return operation in FIG. 28) The first motion control (non-detection) for returning to the origin when it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the production position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to Also referred to) is executed and the operation control. When the first operation control is executed, the movable accessory is at a position away from the origin position. Therefore, the operation is only an operation of moving the movable accessory in the direction of the origin position.

  In addition, if the detected part of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is detected by the origin sensor when the movable accessory initialization operation process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 detects the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory. 175 executes a second operation control (also referred to as an operation control at the time of detection) that performs control so as to perform a short initial operation (operation at the time of detection) that once leaves the home position and returns from the position away from the home position to the home position. .

  For example, in order to ensure that the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period between the time when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor and the operation of the movable accessory in the direction of the origin position is restricted. When an operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may be returned to stop at a position further shifted from the position detected by the origin sensor. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin sensor, the second operation control is performed to perform the short initial operation in order to return the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 to the more accurate origin position.

  In this second operation control, in order to once cancel the detection state of the detected part by the origin sensor, it is necessary to move the movable accessory to a position away from the origin position and then return to the origin position. Since there is no need to move, the movable accessory is moved from the origin position to the detection-time operation position in the vicinity of the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation (see FIGS. 42 to 45).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 performs a first operation control (non-detection operation control) for moving the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 to the origin, and a second operation control (detection) for causing the short initial operation or the long initial operation. Comparison of the control speeds set when executing the operation control (time operation control or operation control for actual operation confirmation). Note that the speeds shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175, It differs from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when moving a movable accessory, even when the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section and another movement When the aspect is different from the section (for example, the section with and without the spring, the straight section and the curved section), or when moving up and down even in the same moving section, the movable accessory was actually operated In some cases, the operating speed may be different from the control speed. Also, even if the same control speed is set for a movable accessory, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable accessory, the actual operation of each movable accessory The speed is not necessarily the same. In the case where a plurality of movable accessories are operated by a stepping motor having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable accessory, the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, When there is a difference in the driving mechanism or the like, the actual operation speed of each movable accessory is not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (A), when executing the long initial operation, the effect control CPU 120 performs control that is set in correspondence with the timer count value of the long initial operation process timer in the set long initial operation process data. The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are operated based on the speed. Specifically, control is performed such that acceleration is accelerated from the origin position and then decelerated and stopped at the rotation end or slide end, and acceleration is accelerated from the rotation end or slide end and then decelerated and stopped at the origin position. That is, a long initial operation (also referred to as an actual operation confirmation operation) for confirming that the movable accessory can operate normally is actually performed by the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 in the movable body effect or the like. It is the same operation as the actual operation, and the control speed of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the rotation end or slide end. That is, when performing the third operation control for executing the movable body effect of the movable accessory, the effect control CPU 120 sets the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed. In order to control the movable accessory to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) of the first speed, the minimum speed (low speed), which is the first speed, is executed even when executing the second motion control for the long initial operation. And a movable accessory is controlled to operate at a speed within a range of a maximum speed (high speed) as a second speed faster than the minimum speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are actual operating speeds of the movable accessory, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following, when the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are operated based on their respective minimum control speeds, they operate at the minimum speed, and when operated based on their respective maximum control speeds, the maximum is achieved. It is assumed that it operates at speed.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed at the time of acceleration and deceleration of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 becomes the minimum speed in the long initial operation. When returning to the origin position after moving to the rotation end or slide end, control is performed so that the minimum speed in the long initial operation is maintained over a longer time than when stopping at the rotation end or slide end. The origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are turned on after the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are surely decelerated.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (B), when executing the short initial operation, the effect control CPU 120 moves from the origin position to the rotation end or the slide end and moves from the rotation end or slide end to the origin position. In the period, control is performed so that the motor always operates at the lowest speed (first speed) in the long initial operation. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 always operates the long initial operation so that the maximum speed in the short initial operation is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the long initial operation (in this embodiment, the same speed as the minimum speed in the long initial operation). The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are controlled based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the above.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29C, when performing the origin return operation, the effect control CPU 120 always performs a long initial during a period of movement from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. Control is performed so as to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation. In other words, the production control CPU 120 has a maximum speed in the first operation control for performing the return to origin operation speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the long initial operation (in this embodiment, the same speed as the minimum speed in the long initial operation). As described above, the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are controlled to operate based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the long initial operation.

  In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable accessory is from the origin position, if the movable accessory is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the long initial operation, In other words, when operated at high speed, when the movable accessory returns to the origin position, the detected part cannot be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, or the movable accessory returns to the origin position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Since there is a possibility that the movable accessory etc. may be damaged due to the impact at the time, the control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed in the long initial operation (second operation control).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the origin control operation 120 or the short initial operation is executed, the effect control CPU 120 always controls the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 to operate based on the minimum speed in the long initial operation. Do. These minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the long initial operation corresponding to each movable accessory 173, 175, and are not control speeds set in common for each movable accessory 173, 175. , 175 may be different.

  Specifically, the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, a drive mechanism including a size, a weight, an operation mode, an operation distance, and a drive motor (each actuator 172A to 172D). Therefore, even when the same control speed is set, the actual operating speeds of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are different. Even when different control speeds are set for the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175, the actual operation speeds of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are different. As described above, the minimum speed is an operation speed based on the control speed set in accordance with each movable accessory 173, 175, and the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 can be operated at an optimum minimum speed. Therefore, it becomes possible to reliably detect a plurality of movable accessories 173 and 175 having different modes at the origin position.

  Next, the variable display start waiting process executed in S170 of the effect control process (S75) shown in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variation display start waiting process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first variation start command (or a second variation start command) has been received (S1000).

  When it is determined in S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has not been received (S1000; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. (S1002). The demonstration effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration performance flag is on (for example, the value “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration performance flag is off (for example, the value “0”). Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

  When it is determined in S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (S1002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (S1004). When it is determined in S1004 that no customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1004 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (S1004; YES), the demonstration effect flag is set to ON (S1006), and the process data corresponding to the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display) is set. (Production control pattern) is selected (S1008), and the production control process timer is started (S1010). Thereby, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is started.

  Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received in the variable display start waiting process of S170 as the condition for starting the demonstration effect has been described. Is not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in a gaming state by a sensor or the like.

  If it is determined in S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (S1002; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation (for example, the stick controller 31A or push). It is determined whether or not there is a predetermined operation using the button 31B (S1012). When it is determined in S1012 that there is no predetermined operation (S1012; NO), the production control CPU 120 executes an initial operation execution process during the demonstration (S1014). Details of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in S1014 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation display start waiting process of S170. That is, when a predetermined operation using the stick controller 31A or the like is not performed during the demonstration production, the demonstration production is continued.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (S1012; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes menu processing (S1013). The menu processing in S1013 displays a menu on the image display device 5 and allows the player to perform an operation according to the menu contents.

  After executing the process of S1013, the effect control CPU 120 ends the fluctuation display start waiting process of S170.

  When it is determined in S1000 that the first variation start command (or second variation start command) has been received (S1000; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. (S1022). If it is determined in S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (S1022; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (S1024). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (S1026).

  After executing the process of S1026, the CPU 120 for effect control turns off the initial operation executed flag (S1027). The initial operation executed flag is a flag that is turned on when an initial operation is executed in the process of S1014. Next, the demo is displayed by turning it off when finishing the variable display start waiting process of S170. When the effect is executed, the initial operation of the movable accessory 173 or the like can be executed again. After executing the process of S1027, the effect control CPU 120 ends the fluctuation display start waiting process of S170.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (S1022; NO), the processing of S1024 is omitted (skip), and the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process. After updating to “1” (S1026), the variation display start waiting process is terminated.

  This is the end of the description of the variable display start waiting process in S170 using FIG.

  Next, details of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in S1014 in the variable display start waiting process (S170) in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration. The movable accessory initial operation process of S151 described with reference to FIG. 27 is executed when an initialization designation command or a power failure recovery designation command is received from the main board 11, whereas S1014 of FIG. The initial operation execution process during the demonstration is executed while the gaming machine 1 is performing the demonstration. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the initial operation is performed at the timing when the power is turned on and other timing is illustrated. Accordingly, it is possible to check the malfunction of the movable accessory 173 and the like except when the power is turned on, and to return to the origin position even when the movable accessory 173 and the like are not at the origin position.

  In the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014 shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initial operation executed flag is on (S10141). During the demonstration production, the initial operation is performed only once. The initial operation executed flag is a flag indicating that the initial operation has been performed in the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in S1014 when the gaming machine 1 starts the demonstration effect. Therefore, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is in the ON state (S10141; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in S1014. As described above, the initial operation executed flag is turned off in the process of S1027 in the variable display start waiting process (S170) of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is not in the on state (S10141; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial operation executed flag to the on state (S10143). The initial operation executed flag may be recorded, for example, in the effect control data holding area 190 described with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S10142, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171A is in the ON state (S10143).

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is on (S10143; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171B is on (S10144).

  If it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (S10144; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation A for executing the initial operation A, and proceeds to S1519 (S10150). ).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (S10144; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation B for executing the initial operation B, and proceeds to S10150. (S10146).

  In the process of S10143, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is not in the on state (S10143; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (S10147).

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is on (S10147; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation C for executing the initial operation C, and proceeds to S10150 (S10148). ).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (S10147; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets initial operation process data for the initial operation D for executing the initial operation D, and proceeds to S10150. (S10149).

  After executing the processing of S10145, S10146, S10148, or S10149, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation speed to the minimum speed in the long initial operation (S10150), and starts the timer count of the initial operation process timer (S10151).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 drives the actuators (actuators 172A to 172D) according to the initial operation process data set in S10145, S10146, S10148, or S10149 (S10152), and the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175. Is operated at the minimum speed in the long initial operation set in SS10150. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process data set in S10145, S10146, S10148, or S10149 has been completed (S10153). If the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S10152 to drive each actuator in accordance with the initial operation process data set in S10145, S10146, S10148, or S10149, and the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 in S10150. Operates at the minimum speed in the set long initial operation.

  In this manner, the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are operated at the minimum speed in the long initial operation until the initial operation process data set in S10145, S10146, S10148, or S10149 is completed. If it is determined in S10153 that the process data has been completed (S10153; YES), the initial operation execution process during the demonstration is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the initial operation A to the initial operation D in FIG. 31 are illustrated as the same operations as the initial operation A to the initial operation D in FIG. However, the initial operation performed in FIG. 31 may be different from the initial operations A to D in FIG.

  This is the end of the description of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration using FIG.

  Next, a first effect operation (movable body effect) using the movable accessory 173 in a normal effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first effect operation using the movable accessory 173. 32 (A) to 32 (E) are time-series explanations of rendering operations that cause the movable accessory 173 to operate using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 32 (A), the effect symbols during the variable display are displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the movable accessory 173 stops at the origin position at the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 1, it is assumed that the player can visually recognize a part of the movable accessory 173 at the origin position. The movable member 173 has a split piece 173B1, a split piece 173B2, and a split piece 173B3. The split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are combined to form a predetermined figure (in a closed state). It shall be. It is assumed that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position above the image display device 5 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 32 (B), the effect symbol “7” is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, indicating that it is in the reach state. The movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 while the split pieces 173B1, 173B2, and split pieces 173B3 are closed, and the effect symbol display area 5C during the variable display is displayed. Hide the directing design.

  Next, in FIG. 32C, in the movable accessory 173, the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are opened by the actuator 172B at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. In order to open the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3, a predetermined space required when the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are opened is required. is there. When the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position shown in FIG. 32A, since there is no predetermined space, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 cannot be opened. That is, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 can be opened only when the movable accessory 173 is at the position shown in FIG. When the split piece 173B2 and the split piece 173B3 are opened, the player can visually recognize the effect symbol display area 5C during the variable display. FIG. 32C illustrates a case where a predetermined effect symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area 5C during the variable display.

  Next, in FIG. 32D, in the movable accessory 173, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 are closed by the actuator 172B at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. When the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are in the closed state, the symbol display area 5C during the change display is hidden again, and the player cannot visually recognize it.

  Next, in FIG. 32E, the movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A and returned to the original position while the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are closed. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. 32 (E) illustrates the case where the final stop symbol is a big hit, but the final stop symbol may be a big hit or off.

  Above, description of the 1st effect | action operation | movement using the movable accessory 173 in a normal effect using FIG. 32 is complete | finished.

  Next, the second and third effect operations (movable body effect) using the movable accessory 173 in the normal effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of the second and third effect operations using the movable accessory 173. 33 (A) to 33 (E) are time-series explanations of performance operations for operating the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. In FIG. 33, FIG. 33 (C1) shows the second effect operation using the movable accessory 173, and FIG. 33 (C2) shows the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173. Is. Note that the second and third effect operations using the movable accessory 173 described with reference to FIG. 33 are shown in FIG. 33A, FIG. 33B, and FIG. 32 (A), FIG. 32 (B), and FIG. 32 (D) of the first effect operation described above are respectively the same effect modes, and therefore a part of the description will be omitted in the following description.

  In FIG. 33 (A), the effect symbols during the variable display are displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. In the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. 33A, the movable accessory 173 stops at the origin position. The split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 of the movable accessory 173 are in a closed state.

  Next, in FIG. 33 (B), effect symbols in the reach state are displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. The movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 with the split pieces 173B1, split pieces 173B2, and split pieces 173B3 closed, so that the effect symbol display area during the variable display is displayed. Hide the 5C effect design.

  Next, in FIG. 33 (C1), the movable accessory 173 moves laterally from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the left side in the figure by the actuator 172C. The movable accessory 173 moved in the horizontal direction hides the effect symbol display area 5L and displays the effect symbol display area 5C so as to be visible to the player. That is, in the second effect operation using the movable accessory 173, it is assumed that an effect operation accompanied by lateral movement in the left direction of the movable accessory 173 is performed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 33 (C2), the movable accessory 173 moves laterally from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the right side in the figure by the actuator 172C. The movable accessory 173 moved in the horizontal direction hides the effect symbol display area 5R and displays the effect symbol display area 5C so that the player can visually recognize it. That is, in the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173, it is assumed that an effect operation accompanied by lateral movement in the right direction of the movable accessory 173 is performed.

  The second effect operation and the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173 are executed when any one of the effect operations is selected, and the second effect operation and the third effect operation are performed. It shall not be executed at the same time. 33 (C1) and 33 (C2) exemplify the case where the effect symbol display area 5C being displayed in a variable manner is simply displayed as the movable accessory 173 moves laterally. A specific effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 along with the lateral movement of 173.

  Next, in FIG. 33D, the movable accessory 173 is returned to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 from the position shown in FIG. 33C1 or 33C2 by the actuator 172C. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the central portion of the display screen of the image display device 5, the symbol display area 5C during the variable display is hidden again.

  Next, in FIG. 33E, the movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A and returned to the origin position. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5.

  This is the end of the description of the second effect operation and the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173 in the normal effect using FIG.

  Next, a fourth effect operation (movable body effect) using the movable accessory 175 in a normal effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of the fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175. 34 (A) to 34 (C) are time-series explanations of presentation operations for operating the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 34 (A), the effect symbol display in the variable display is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. In the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. 34A, the movable accessory 173 is stopped at the origin position. It is assumed that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position above the image display device 5 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 34 (B), the effect symbol “7” is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, indicating that it is in the reach state. The movable accessory 175 is lowered from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the actuator 172C. The lowered movable combination 175 hides the effect symbol in the effect symbol display area 5C during the variable display.

  Next, in FIG. 34C, the movable accessory 175 is raised by the actuator 172C and returned to the origin position. When the movable accessory 175 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5.

  This is the end of the description of the fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175 in the normal effect using FIG.

  Next, details of the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C for operating the movable accessory 173 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C that operate the movable accessory.

  In FIG. 35, the movable accessory 173 has movable mechanisms such as a rotation mechanism 173A and a slide mechanism 173C.

  First, the rotation operation of the movable accessory 173 by the rotation mechanism 173A will be described. The rotation mechanism 173A is rotated by the actuator 172A. The position in FIG. 35A is the origin position of the rotation mechanism 173A rotated by the actuator 172A. The origin position (a) of the rotation mechanism 173A is detected by the origin sensor 171A. The origin sensor 171A can detect that the rotating rotation mechanism 173A returns to the original position by detecting a part of the rotation mechanism 173A, for example.

  The movable accessory 173 at the origin position (a) is moved clockwise in the drawing to the position shown in FIG. 35B shown by the broken line by the turning mechanism 173A rotated by the actuator 172A. The rotation mechanism 173A rotated to the position of FIG. 35 (b) is locked so as not to rotate any more, for example, by a mechanical locking member or the like (not shown).

  The origin position in FIG. 35A is the position of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIG. That is, the origin position in FIG. 35A is the lower left position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. Further, the position in FIG. 35B is the position of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIG. That is, the position in FIG. 35B is the position of the central portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG.

  The actuator 172A rotates the rotation mechanism 173A between the origin position in FIG. 35 (a) and the position in FIG. 35 (b). For example, the effect control CPU 120 can control the actuator 172A so as to perform an effect operation in which the rotation mechanism 173A is simply reciprocated between the origin position of FIG. 35A and the position of FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may control the actuator 172A so as to perform an effect operation in which the turning mechanism 173A reciprocates a plurality of times between the origin position in FIG. 35A and the position shown in FIG. . The effect control CPU 120 may perform a plurality of effect operations by changing the number of times and the speed of rotating the rotation mechanism 173A. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may selectively execute a strong operation for quickly rotating the rotation mechanism 173A multiple times and a weak operation for slowly rotating the rotation mechanism 173A once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the rotation mechanism 173A using the actuator 172A and the origin sensor 171A to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the rotation mechanism 173A is the position where the rotation mechanism 173A is rotated counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 35 and the origin sensor 171A is first turned on. For example, when the origin sensor 171A is on before returning to the origin, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the actuator 172A in the clockwise direction shown in FIG. 35 until the origin sensor 171A is turned off, and then the actuator 172A. Is rotated counterclockwise to stop the actuator 172A when the origin sensor 171A is turned on, thereby returning the rotation mechanism 173A to the origin position (short initial operation). When the origin sensor 171A is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the actuator 172A counterclockwise to stop the actuator 172A when the origin sensor 171A is in the on state. The rotation mechanism 173A is returned to the origin position (origin return operation). In this embodiment, even if the rotation mechanism 173A is rotating further counterclockwise from the origin position before returning to the origin, the rotation is mechanically locked and the origin sensor 171A is in the on state. Shall be maintained.

  Next, the sliding operation of the movable accessory 173 by the slide mechanism 173C will be described. The slide mechanism 173C is slid in the lateral direction by the actuator 172C. The position in FIG. 35B is the origin position of the slide mechanism 173C that is slid by the actuator 172C. That is, the actuator 172C can slide in the lateral direction when the actuator 172A rotates clockwise and is in the position (b). The origin position (b) of the slide mechanism 173C is detected by the origin sensor 171C. The origin sensor 171C may detect the position of the slide mechanism 173C in the lateral direction by detecting, for example, a detection plate provided in the slide mechanism 173C.

  The movable accessory 173 in the position of FIG. 35 (a) is moved in the illustrated horizontal direction to the position of FIG. 35 (c1) or (c2) indicated by a broken line by the slide mechanism 173C slid by the actuator 172C. Is done. The slide mechanism 173C slid to the position shown in FIG. 35 (c1) or (c2) is locked so as not to slide any more, for example, by a mechanical locking member (not shown).

  The position in FIG. 35 (c1) is the position on the left side of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 33 (C1). The position in FIG. 35 (c2) is the position on the right side of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 33 (C2).

  The actuator 172C slides the slide mechanism 173C between the position shown in FIG. 35B and the position shown in FIG. 35C1 or FIG. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may control the actuator 172C to perform an effect operation in which the slide mechanism 173C is simply reciprocated between the position shown in FIG. 35B and the position shown in FIG. 35C1 or FIG. it can. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the actuator 172C to perform an effect operation in which the slide mechanism 173C reciprocates a plurality of times between the position shown in FIG. 35B and the position shown in FIG. 35C1 or FIG. Also good. The production control CPU 120 may perform a plurality of production operations by changing the number and speed of sliding the slide mechanism 173C. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may selectively execute a strong operation of quickly sliding the slide mechanism 173C a plurality of times and a weak operation of slowly sliding the slide mechanism 173C once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the slide mechanism 173C using the actuator 172C and the origin sensor 171C to the origin position will be described. It is assumed that the origin position of the slide mechanism 173C is a position at which the origin sensor 171C is first turned on by the slide mechanism 173C sliding to the right in FIG. For example, when the origin sensor 171C is on before returning to the origin, the effect control CPU 120 slides the actuator 172C to the left in FIG. 35 until the origin sensor 171C is turned off, and then moves the actuator 172C to the right. When the origin sensor 171C is slid, the actuator 172C is stopped to return the slide mechanism 173C to the origin position (short initial operation). When the origin sensor 171C is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 slides the actuator 172C to the right and stops the actuator 172C when the origin sensor 171C is in the on state. The mechanism 173C is returned to the origin position (origin return operation). However, if the slide mechanism 173C is on the right side of the origin sensor 171C before the origin return, the origin sensor 171C is not turned on even if the actuator 172C is slid rightward. If the origin sensor 171C is not turned on within a predetermined time, the actuator 172C is slid to the left to confirm that the origin sensor 171C is turned on, and then the origin sensor 171C is turned on before the origin return described above. The slide mechanism 173C may be returned to the origin position by an operation when the state is in the state.

  Note that the rotation mechanism 173A may be disposed on the back side of the image display device 5, and move and move the movable accessory 173 from the back side of the image display device 5 with a magnet or the like. By disposing the rotation mechanism 173A on the back side of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the rotation mechanism 173A from obstructing the display screen of the image display device 5. Note that the opening / closing mechanism 173B described with reference to FIG. 36 and the lifting mechanism 173D described with reference to FIG. It may be held and moved by, for example.

  The description of the details of the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C for operating the movable accessory 173 using FIG.

  Next, details of the actuator 172B that operates the movable accessory 173 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of an actuator 172B that operates the movable accessory 173.

  In FIG. 36, the movable accessory 173 has a movable mechanism of an opening / closing mechanism 173B. The opening / closing mechanism 173B is opened / closed by an actuator 172B. 36A shows that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in a closed state, and FIG. 36B shows that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in an open state. The opening / closing mechanism 173B has three split pieces: a split piece 173B1, a split piece 173B2, and a split piece 173B3.

  36A, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 are combined in a closed state to form a predetermined shape. In FIG. 36 (A), the actuator 172B has a rotating circular gear (pinion), and is a chopped flat plate (rack) connected to the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3. Are meshed with the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13. The position in FIG. 36A is the origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B that is opened and closed by the actuator 172B. The origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is detected by the origin sensor 171B. The origin sensor 171B can detect that the opening / closing mechanism 173B to be opened / closed is the origin position in the closed state by detecting a part of the rack 173B11.

  36A, when the actuator 172B is driven and the pinion rotates counterclockwise in the drawing, the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 meshing with the pinion linearly in the direction of the arrow shown in the drawing. Moving. The rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 move linearly in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, so that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the open state shown in FIG.

  The lower part of FIG. 36B shows a state where the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 have moved in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. At this time, the split pieces 173B1, split pieces 173B2, and split pieces 173B3 respectively connected to the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 are separated from each other as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. Become. As shown in FIG. 32C, it is assumed that the center portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 is visible by opening the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3. When the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the open state, the origin sensor 171B is in the off state.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the opening / closing mechanism 173B using the actuator 172B and the origin sensor 171B to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is a position where the origin sensor 171B is first turned on when the rack 173B11 of the opening / closing mechanism 173B rotates in the upward direction of FIG. 36B. For example, when the origin sensor 171B is in the on state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 drives the actuator 172B until the origin sensor 171B is in the off state, and rotates the pinion in the clockwise direction shown in FIG. 36 (A). Next, the actuator 172B is driven to rotate the pinion counterclockwise, and when the origin sensor 171B is turned on, the actuator 172B is stopped to return the opening / closing mechanism 173B to the origin position (short). Initial operation). When the origin sensor 171B is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 drives the actuator 172B to rotate the pinion clockwise to turn the origin sensor 171B on. Is stopped to return the opening / closing mechanism 173B to the origin position (origin return operation). In this embodiment, even when the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in a state of being further closed from the origin position before returning to the origin, the split pieces 173B1, split pieces 173B2, and split pieces 173B3 are brought into contact with each other and locked. The origin sensor 171B is assumed to be kept on.

  The description of the details of the actuator 172B that operates the movable accessory 173 using FIG.

  Next, details of the actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175. As shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 37, the movable accessory 175 has a movable mechanism of an elevating mechanism 173D. The lifting mechanism 173D is lifted and lowered by the actuator 172D. The movable accessory 175 at the position of FIG. 37 (a) is moved in the illustrated vertical direction to the position of FIG. 37 (b) indicated by a broken line by an elevating mechanism 173D that is moved up and down by the actuator 172D. The raising / lowering mechanism 173D lowered to the position of FIG. 37 (b) is locked so as not to be lowered further by, for example, a mechanical locking member or the like (not shown). The position in FIG. 37 (b) is the center position of the display screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 34 (B).

  The actuator 172D moves the lifting mechanism 173D up and down between the position shown in FIG. 37A and the position shown in FIG. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can control the actuator 172D so as to perform an effect operation in which the elevating mechanism 173D is simply reciprocated between the position shown in FIG. 37A and the position shown in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may control the actuator 172D so as to perform an effect operation in which the elevating mechanism 173D is reciprocated a plurality of times between the position shown in FIG. 37A and the position shown in FIG. The production control CPU 120 may perform a plurality of production operations by changing the number of times and the speed at which the elevation mechanism 173D is raised and lowered. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may selectively execute a strong operation of moving the lifting mechanism 173D up and down a plurality of times quickly and a weak operation of moving the lifting mechanism 173D up and down slowly once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the lifting mechanism 173D using the actuator 172D and the origin sensor 171D to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the lifting mechanism 173D is assumed to be a position where the lifting mechanism 173D is moved upward in FIG. 37 and the origin sensor 171D is first turned on. For example, when the origin sensor 171D is on before returning to the origin, the effect control CPU 120 lowers the actuator 172D in the downward direction shown in FIG. 37 until the origin sensor 171D is turned off, and then the actuator 172D. Is moved upward to stop the actuator 172D when the origin sensor 171D is turned on, thereby returning the lifting mechanism 173D to the origin position (short initial operation). When the origin sensor 171D is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 raises and lowers the actuator 172D by moving the actuator 172D upward and stopping the actuator 172D when the origin sensor 171D is in the on state. The mechanism 173D is returned to the origin position (origin return operation). In this embodiment, it is assumed that even if the lifting mechanism 173D is further raised from the origin position before returning to the origin, the rise is mechanically locked and the origin sensor 171D is kept on.

  This is the end of the detailed description of the actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175 using FIG.

  Next, a long initial operation, which is one of the initial operations of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175, using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIGS. . As described above, the long initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 and the like are operated in the same manner as a normal production operation (movable body production). By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to check whether or not a defect occurs in the movable accessory 173 or the like in the normal performance operation. The initial operation is executed subsequent to the operation of returning the origin of each actuator described above. In this embodiment, when the long initial operation is executed as the initial operation, the initial operation always performs a constant operation regardless of the origin return operation of the actuator.

  In FIGS. 38 to 46, the operation of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is represented by arrows, and the drawings are simplified. The arrows illustrated in FIGS. 38 to 46 indicate the operation ranges of the respective actuators. The solid line arrows exemplify a case where each actuator moves from the origin to the operation end in the initial operation. In addition, the numbers in parentheses starting from (1) illustrated in each figure indicate the order of initial operations.

  First, the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B described in FIG. 38 performs the same operation as the first effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 38 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A.

  In FIG. 38 (2), the movable accessory 173 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. In order to open the opening / closing mechanism 173B, as described above, the movable accessory 173 needs to be rotated to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is executed at the rotation end even in the initial operation.

  In FIG. 38 (3), the movable accessory 173 is changed from the open state to the closed state by the opening / closing mechanism 173B.

  In FIG. 38 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the long initial operation is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where each actuator is simply reciprocated as described above is exemplified as the long initial operation described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. However, in the long initial operation, the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 may be operated a plurality of times, for example, in the same manner as the normal performance operation. Further, a predetermined sound effect may be output from the speaker 8 or the lamp 9 may be turned on in accordance with the operation of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175.

  The description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B using FIG.

  Next, a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C described in FIG. 39 is the same as the second effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 39 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A.

  In FIG. 39 (2), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the left slide end in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 39 (3), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the left direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 39 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, and the long initial operation ends.

  The description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C using FIG.

  Next, a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating another example of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C described in FIG. 40 performs the same operation as the third effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 40 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A.

  In FIG. 40 (2), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the slide end in the right direction in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 40 (3), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the right direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 40 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, and the long initial operation ends.

  In this embodiment, the long initial operation is intended to check whether or not a malfunction occurs in the movable accessory by the same operation as the normal production operation. Assume that the initial operations described in FIG. 40 are performed separately.

  The description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C using FIG.

  Next, the long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating another example of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D described in FIG. 41 is the same as the fourth effect operation described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 41 (1), the movable accessory 175 is lowered from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the lifting mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D.

  In FIG. 41 (2), the movable accessory 175 is raised from the descending end to the origin position by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D, and the long initial operation is ended.

  The description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D using FIG.

  The initial operations described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41 may be executed sequentially. The order of initial operations executed at that time is arbitrary. For example, after the initial operation illustrated in FIG. 38 is executed, the initial operation illustrated in FIG. 39, the initial operation illustrated in FIG. 39, and the initial operation illustrated in FIG. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the second operation control for causing the movable accessory to perform a long initial operation in order to confirm that the movable accessory can operate normally.

  Next, details of the initial operation A to the initial operation D described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. The initial operation A to the initial operation D are short initial operations of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator 172D. As described above, the short initial operation is an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 or the like is operated by omitting a part of the normal performance operation, and is for confirming that the movable accessory can operate normally. Refers to the operation. By performing the short initial operation, it is possible to check the operation of the movable accessory 173 and the like in a shorter time than when performing the long initial operation. In this embodiment, when the short initial operation is performed as the initial operation, the initial operation is performed in the modes of the initial operation A to the initial operation D in accordance with the mode of the return to origin operation of the actuator.

  42 to 46, the arrows when the movable mechanisms move from the origin position to the operating end (long initial operation) are indicated by solid lines. In addition, each movable mechanism has an arrow when the origin sensor that detects each movable mechanism moves from the on state to the off state, and when the origin sensor moves from the off state to the on state (short circuit). The arrow of (initial operation) is represented by a broken line. The operation in which each movable mechanism moves until the origin sensor that detects each movable mechanism moves from the on state to the off state and then moves until the origin sensor turns on again is referred to as a short initial operation. By performing the short initial operation, the moving distance of the movable mechanism is shortened, and the operation confirmation time can be shortened. That is, in the present embodiment, the short initial operation is also an origin return operation and can be said to be a long initial operation for operation confirmation. Further, the origin return operation when each movable mechanism moves by the origin return operation is indicated by a dotted line with an arrow.

  Further, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 8 or the lamp 9 is turned on in accordance with the initial operations A to D of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 described with reference to FIGS. May be.

  First, the operation of the initial operation A of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation A of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. The initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the origin return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B do not perform the origin return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is on and the origin sensor 171B for detecting the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is on before executing the initial operation, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B do not need to perform an origin return operation. However, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are on. Therefore, in the initial operation A, even if the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are in the on state, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are set to the accurate origin by performing a predetermined initial operation (short initial operation). Can be moved to a position.

  42 to 45, the origin sensor 171D for detecting the origin of the elevating mechanism 173D is in an ON state before executing the initial operation, and the movable accessory 175 performs the initial operation by the short initial operation. To do.

  42 (1) and 42 (2), the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by an elevating mechanism 173D operated by an actuator 172D.

  In FIG. 42 (3), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A as shown by the solid line in the figure. Moved. In order to open / close the opening / closing mechanism 173B, it is necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end, and therefore the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the short initial operation and rotates to the rotation end.

  42 (4) and 42 (5), the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 42 (6), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the initial operation A is completed.

  The description of the operation of the initial operation A of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D using FIG.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. The initial operation B is an initial operation executed when the operation mode of the origin return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the origin return operation and the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is on before executing the initial operation, the rotation mechanism 173A does not need to perform the origin return operation. On the other hand, when the origin sensor 171B that detects the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the OFF state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B needs to perform an origin return operation. The rotation mechanism 173A may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171A is on. Therefore, in the initial operation B, even if the origin sensor 171A is in the ON state, the rotation mechanism 173A can be moved to an accurate origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation (short initial operation). In addition, since the opening / closing mechanism 173B that performs the origin return operation can be moved to the correct origin position by the origin return operation, it is possible to omit the execution of the initial operation and to check the operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B.

  In FIG. 43 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by the dotted line in the drawing by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B.

  43 (2) and 43 (3), the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the figure by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D.

  43 (4) and 43 (5), the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. In the initial operation B, since the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the opening operation, it is not necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end. Therefore, the time for checking the operation of the rotation mechanism 173A can be shortened by the short initial operation.

  The description of the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D using FIG.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. The initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the home return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A performs the home return operation and the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the home return operation. If the origin sensor 171A that detects the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is in the OFF state before the initial operation is performed, the rotation mechanism 173A needs to perform an origin return operation. On the other hand, when the origin sensor 171B that detects the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the ON state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not need to perform the origin return operation. The opening / closing mechanism 173B may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171B is in the on state. Therefore, in the initial operation C, even when the origin sensor 171B is in the ON state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B can be moved to the correct origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation (short initial operation). Further, the rotation mechanism 173A that performs the origin return operation can move to the correct origin position by the origin return operation, but in order to open and close the opening / closing mechanism 173B, an initial operation that rotates from the origin position to the rotation end is performed.

  In FIG. 44 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs a return to origin operation as shown by the dotted line in the drawing by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A.

  44 (2) and 44 (3), the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by an elevating mechanism 173D operated by an actuator 172D.

  In FIG. 44 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A as shown by the solid line in the figure. Moved. In order to open / close the opening / closing mechanism 173B, it is necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end. Therefore, the rotation mechanism 173A rotates to the rotation end even when the origin is returned.

  44 (5) and (6), the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 44 (7), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the initial operation C is completed.

  The description of the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D using FIG.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D. The initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the home position return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B perform the home position return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A and the origin sensor 171B for detecting the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B are in the OFF state before the initial operation is performed, the rotation mechanism 173A performs the origin return operation. Need to do. Therefore, in the initial operation D, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are returned to the origin, and the initial operations of the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are omitted.

  In FIG. 45 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by the dotted line in the drawing by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 45 (2), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by a dotted line in the drawing by a rotating mechanism 173A operated by an actuator 172A.

  45 (3) and 45 (4), the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the figure by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D.

  The description of the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172D using FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the coupling of the initial operation of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of coupling of the initial operation of the movable accessory using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator. In the combination of the initial operations, a plurality of initial operations of the movable accessory are combined to suppress a time required for confirming the plurality of operations, thereby executing a suitable initial operation.

  In this embodiment, the case where the slide operation of the slide mechanism 173C in the long initial operation described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40 is combined to suppress the time of the initial operation related to the slide mechanism 173C is illustrated.

  In FIG. 46 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, as shown by the solid line in the figure. Moved.

  46 (2) and 46 (3), the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 46 (4), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the slide end in the right direction in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C.

  46 (5), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the right direction in the drawing to the slide end in the left direction in the drawing by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C.

  46 (6), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the left direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C.

  46 (4) to 46 (5) is a combination of the sliding operation of FIGS. 39 (2) and (3) and the sliding operation of FIGS. 40 (2) and (3). By combining the slide operation, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced as compared with the case where the right slide operation and the left slide operation are performed in separate initial operations.

  46 (7), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A.

  46 (8) and 46 (9), the movable accessory 175 performs the short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the figure by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D and ends the initial operation.

  The description of the coupling of the initial operation of the movable combination using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator using FIG.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the origin return operation as the first operation control and the short initial operation in the initial operations A to D as the second operation control are performed at the minimum speed in the long initial operation. Run. That is, the production control CPU 120 confirms that the movable action can be normally operated with the first action control for performing the return to origin operation during the execution of the movable action initial action process and the initial action execution process during the demonstration. A second initial motion control for performing a short initial motion and a long initial motion for performing, and during the game, a third motion control for performing a movable body effect by a movable accessory can be performed, When executing the second operation control, the first operation control is performed at a speed within the range of the lowest speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed that is faster than the lowest speed. When the first movement control is executed in such a manner that the movable combination is operated in a manner according to the movement, the movable combination operates at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the long initial operation as the second movement control. The sea urchin control.

  By doing in this way, suitable 2nd operation control can be performed. Specifically, in the second operation control, the mode of the origin return operation in the first operation control (for example, the mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the origin return operation in FIG. 42 or FIG. 43 and the mode in FIG. 44 or FIG. A mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A performs a home return operation, a mode in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform a home position return operation in FIG. 42 or 44, a mode in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs a home position return operation in FIG. (For example, in FIGS. 42 to 45, when the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation, the initial operation is not performed, or the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B is The movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are initially operated (for example, in a mode in which an initial operation is performed when the origin return operation is not performed) (for example, FIG. 42 to FIG. Controls to perform a short initial operation) shown in 5. That is, when the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 perform the origin return operation in the first operation control, the short initial operation is not performed in the second operation control, and the movable combination 173 and the movable combination in the first operation control. When the object 175 does not perform the home return operation, the short initial operation is performed in the second operation control, and therefore the short initial operation in the second operation control can be performed only when necessary.

  In the first operation control, the movable accessory operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, and thus can be safely positioned at the origin position. Specifically, in the home return operation and short initial operation, the distance to move the movable accessory to the home position may be shorter than in the long initial operation. By setting the minimum speed in the initial operation, it is possible to reliably detect the detected portion by the detecting means, and it is possible to prevent the movable accessory from being damaged by the movement-restricted impact while moving at a high speed.

  In addition, when performing return-to-origin operation or short initial operation, when controlling the movable accessory to operate at a speed lower than the minimum speed in long initial operation, set when performing return-to-origin operation or short initial operation. The control speed to be set and the minimum control speed set in the long initial operation may be the same control speed or different control speeds.

  Further, when the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are in the ON state, the rotation mechanism 173A operates as shown in FIGS. 42 (3) and 42 (6), and the opening / closing mechanism 173B works as shown in FIGS. By performing the initial operation in the operation 42 (5), it is possible to confirm the operation in the initial operation even when the movable accessory 173 is located at the origin position.

  Further, when the rotation mechanism 173A performs the operation shown in FIG. 45 (2) as the origin return operation, or when the opening / closing mechanism 173B executes the operation shown in FIG. 45 (1), the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the initial operation. By not performing it, a preferable initial operation can be executed by suppressing the time required for the operation check.

  Also, when the rotating mechanism 173A of the movable accessory 173 performs the returning operation of FIG. 44 (1), the operations of the rotating mechanism 173A of FIGS. 44 (4) and 44 (7) are the same as those of the opening / closing mechanism 173B. By performing according to the operations of (5) and FIG. 44 (6), a suitable initial operation according to the situation can be executed.

  Further, the long initial operation shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 of the turning mechanism 173A, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C of the movable accessory 173, and the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175 is the origin return operation or initial operation A to A. If it is executed after D, it is possible to suitably check the effect operations of the movable actors 173 and 175.

  In addition to the execution of the movable accessory initial operation process of S151 executed by the effect control CPU 120, the return-to-origin operation and the initial operation are also performed at the timing when the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014 shown in FIG. 31 is executed. By performing the operations A to D, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the rendering operation by performing the return operation other than when the power is turned on.

  46 (4) to (6), in which the initial movement is a mixture of the leftward sliding movement of FIG. 39 (2) and FIG. 39 (3) and the rightward sliding movement of FIG. By executing by a left-right direction sliding operation or the like, it is possible to execute a suitable initial operation by suppressing the time required for confirming the plurality of operations of the movable actors 173 and 175.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the two movable combinations 173 and 175 are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of movable combinations provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 As shown in FIG. 47 as a modification, three or more movable accessories (first movable accessory 300, second movable accessory 400, and third movable accessory 500) are connected to a pachinko gaming machine. 1001 may be provided.

  Here, the structure of each of the first movable combination 300, the second movable combination 400, and the third movable combination 500 in the present modification will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual operation check operation (long initial operation) in the first movable accessory 300. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual operation check operation (long initial operation) in the second movable accessory 400. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual operation check operation (long initial operation) in the third movable accessory 500.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the first movable accessory 300 is provided at a position below the image display device 5 between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, at a predetermined location. A base portion 301 fixed to the base portion 301, a first movable portion 302 provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the base portion 301, and a first retracted position (origin position, initial position) where the first movable portion 302 tilts sideways. 53) and a first effect position (see FIG. 53B) in which the first movable portion 302 stands vertically in a position away from the first retraction (see FIG. 53B). And a first movable accessory driving motor 303 to be moved). In this modification, a stepping motor is applied as the first movable accessory driving motor 303.

  A bearing hole 310 is formed through the base portion 301, and a guide groove 311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 310 is formed around the bearing hole 310. A first movable accessory drive motor 303 is fixed to the back surface of the back surface of the base portion 301 at the lower right side of the bearing hole 310, and a drive shaft (not shown) that protrudes forward through the base portion 301. A turntable 312 is fixed to the tip.

  A shaft member 313 that faces in the front-rear direction protrudes from a predetermined peripheral edge of the turntable 312, and the lower end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 313. In addition, a detected portion 315 is provided on the opposite side of the peripheral edge of the turntable 312 to the shaft member 313, and the detected movable portion origin detection sensor 315 is provided below the turntable 312. By being detected by 316, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the first movable part 302 is located at the tilt position (origin position). That is, the first movable combination 300 is an operation target combination that is a target of non-detection operation or detection operation described later. The non-detection operation and the detection operation correspond to the short initial operation in this modification.

  In the present modification, the first movable portion 302 is retracted below the display screen of the image display device 5 when the first movable portion 302 is in the first retracted position (see FIG. 1), and the first effect position separated from the first retracted position. In FIG. 4, at least a part of the image display device 5 is superimposed on the front side of the display screen.

  The first movable portion 302 is provided on a rotating member 320 that is provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the base portion 301. For example, the front portion can emit light by a built-in light emitter (not shown). The rotation member 320 is formed of a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction. A rotation shaft 325 inserted into the bearing hole 310 from the rear side on the right side of the front surface and a guide projecting from the left side of the rotation shaft 325 are provided. A first guide shaft 326 inserted into the groove 311 from the rear side, and a second guide shaft 327 protruding from the upper right side of the rotation shaft 325 and inserted into the guide groove 311 from the rear side.

  The upper end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported at the tip of the second guide shaft 327 that is inserted through the guide groove 311 and protrudes to the front side of the base portion 301. That is, the turntable 312 and the rotation member 320 are connected via the link member 314. In addition, a coil spring 328 that constantly urges the rotation member 320 toward the first effect position side is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 325.

  In the first movable accessory 300 configured as described above, the first movable portion 302 is located at the tilt position as shown in FIG. 53A at the origin position (initial position). Then, when the turntable 312 is rotated clockwise by the first movable accessory driving motor 303 and the second guide shaft 327 is pulled downward by the link member 314, the rotation shaft 325 is centered. The first movable portion 302 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the front, and rotates to the standing position that is the first effect position shown in FIG. In addition, since the urging | biasing force of the coil spring 328 acts when rotating from a 1st retraction position to a 1st production position, the load concerning the 1st movable accessory drive motor 303 is reduced. Further, the first movable accessory driving motor 303 is reversely driven to rotate from the first retracted position to the first effect position.

  Further, when the first movable accessory 300 moves to the first retracted position, the first guide shaft 326 contacts one end of the guide groove 311, whereby the first movable accessory 300 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the first movable accessory 300 moves to the first effect position, the second guide shaft 327 contacts the other end of the guide groove 311, so that the first movable accessory 300 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front. The rotation is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the second movable accessory 400 is extended in the left-right direction and has a second movable part 401 that is slightly shorter than the left-right dimension of the image display device 5, and is extended in the vertical direction to display an image. And a second movable part 402 having substantially the same size as the vertical dimension of the device 5. The second movable parts 401 and 402 are provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. Further, the second movable part 402 is provided at a position behind the second movable part 401. The second movable unit 401 is a panel on which, for example, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed when the second movable unit 401 is in a second retracted position, which will be described later, and the second movable unit at a position above the image display device 5. A part is concealed by a logo panel 450 provided in front of 401.

  A rack gear 410 is fixed to the left end portion of the second movable portion 401 and is directed to the vertical direction. The rack gear 410 has a pinion gear 412 fixed to a drive shaft of a second movable accessory drive motor 411 formed of a stepping motor. Are engaged. The second movable accessory driving motor 411 is fixed to a base portion (not shown) provided on the left side of the image display device 5. The second movable portion 401 is guided by a guide member (not shown) so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the second movable portion 401 is moved by the second movable accessory driving motor 411 to the second retraction position above the image display device 5 (the origin position, the initial position, see the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 54A). The vertical direction between the second effect position (refer to the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 54B) that is disposed at a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the image display device 5 and is away from the second retracted position. It is possible to move back and forth.

  Further, a detected portion 430A is projected from the right end portion of the second movable portion 401, and the detected portion 430A is detected by a second movable accessory origin detection sensor 440A provided on the base portion side. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the second movable portion 401 is located at the second retraction position (origin position).

  A rack gear 420 facing in the left-right direction is fixed to an upper end portion of the second movable portion 402, and a pinion gear 422 fixed to the drive shaft of the second movable accessory drive motor 421 including a stepping motor is attached to the rack gear 420. Are engaged. The second movable accessory driving motor 421 is fixed to a base portion (not shown) at a substantially central position in the left-right direction above the image display device 5. The second movable portion 402 is guided by a guide member (not shown) so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  Accordingly, the second movable portion 402 is moved by the second movable accessory driving motor 421 to the second retraction position on the left side of the image display device 5 (see the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 54A) and the image display device 5. And a second effect position (refer to a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 54B) arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in front of the left-right direction.

  Further, a detected portion 430B protrudes from the lower end portion of the second movable portion 402, and the detected portion 430B is detected by a second movable accessory origin detection sensor 440B provided on the base portion side. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the second movable portion 402 is located at the second retraction position (origin position). That is, the second movable combination 400 is an operation target combination that is a target of non-detection operation or detection operation described later.

  In the second movable accessory 400 configured in this way, the second movable portion 401 is located above the image display device 5 at the second retracted position (origin position, initial position) as shown in FIG. 2 The movable part 402 is located on the left side of the image display device 5. And the 2nd movable parts 401 and 402 move to the 2nd production position shown in Drawing 54 (B) by driving the 2nd movable combination drive motor 411, 421, and the 2nd movable combination drive motor 411 ,. By reverse driving 421, the second effect position moves to the second retreat position.

  In addition, although the second movable accessory 400 is not particularly illustrated, the second movable portion 400 and the second movable portion 401 and 402 are brought into contact with the restriction portion on the base portion side when moved to the second retraction position, so The movement of the movable accessory 400 in the second retracted position direction is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the third movable accessory 500 is partially imaged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2. It is provided so as to be superimposed on the display device 5. The third movable accessory 500 includes a base portion 501 having a circular shape when viewed from the front, fixed at a predetermined location, a third movable portion 502 provided to be rotatable with respect to the base portion 501, and a third movable portion 502. Has a third movable accessory drive motor 520 that rotates (rotates) about a rotation shaft 503 that faces in the front-rear direction. In this modification, a stepping motor is applied as the third movable accessory driving motor 520.

  A third movable accessory driving motor 520 is provided above the rotating shaft 503 on the back surface of the base portion 501, and a first gear 505 is fixed to the tip of the driving shaft 520 A of the third movable accessory driving motor 520. Yes. A second gear 506 is meshed with the first gear 505, and a third gear 507 fixed to the rear end of the rotating shaft 503 is meshed with the second gear 506, and the third movable accessory driving motor 520 When the first gear 505 rotates, the rotational force of the first gear 505 is transmitted to the third movable portion 502 via the second gear 506 and the third gear 507, so that the third movable portion 502 is Forward rotation or reverse rotation about the rotation axis 503 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the third movable portion 502 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, has a predetermined pattern on the front surface, and is provided so that the front surface can emit light by a built-in light-emitting body (not shown). ing. As described above, the third movable portion 502 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the predetermined pattern has no particular top and bottom, and does not move from a predetermined position only by rotating around the rotation shaft 503. There is no position. Therefore, it is an operation non-target object that does not have an origin detection sensor for detecting the origin position.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts showing the movable accessory initial operation process of the present modification. In the movable accessory initial operation process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the movable accessory to be operated first based on the setting data (S1101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable combination. In this modification, the order of the first movable combination 300 → the second movable combination 400 → the third movable combination 500 is preset as the order. Has been. Therefore, when S1101 is executed for the first time, the first movable accessory 300 is specified as the target movable accessory.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the movable combination identified in S1101 is an origin detection target combination that needs to be detected (S1102).

  In this modified example, as the origin detection target combination that needs to be detected, the first movable combination 300 having the first movable combination origin detection sensor 316 and the second movable combination origin detection sensor 440A, The second movable combination 400 having 440B corresponds to the third movable combination 500 having no origin detection sensor. Therefore, when the movable combination identified in S1101 is the first movable combination 300 or the second movable combination 400, the determination is “Y”, while the movable combination identified in S1101 is the first movable combination. In the case of the three movable objects 500, it is determined as “N”.

  If it is determined as “N” in S1102, the process proceeds to S1130. On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S1102, the process proceeds to S1103, where the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the action subject is specified (S1103), and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable accessory is located at the origin position (initial position) (S1104).

  If it is not at the origin position (initial position) (S1104; N), the process proceeds to S1105, and after setting the non-detection operation frequency counter to 0 for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S1105), the control speed for operating the acting object to be operated is the same as the minimum speed (see FIG. 50, FIG. 51) in the later-described actual operation check operation control (long initial operation control as the second operation control). A minimum control speed for operating the acting object at the operating speed is set (S1106). If the actuating object driving motor is, for example, the acting object is the first movable object 300, the first movable The accessory drive motor 303 is started to drive in the direction of the origin position (S1107), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S1108). Note that the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized in the initialization process of S71. .

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether the origin detection sensor is in a detection state and whether the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S1109, S110).

  By driving a drive device (for example, the first movable accessory drive motor 303) of the operation target object in the origin position direction, the operation object combination is located at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. If this happens, the driving of the movable accessory driving motor is stopped, and the process proceeds to S1130. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer becomes a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the action target is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S1112 is performed. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S1112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the non-startup error determination number (for example, 3). Determination is made (S1113).

  If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S1113, the driving of the movable accessory driving motor is stopped, and the origin return error of the operation subject accessory is stored (S1114). The process proceeds to S1130. That is, in the non-detection operation control, when the operation target combination is not located at the origin position (initial position), the operation control for actual operation confirmation to be described later is not executed for the operation target combination ( The return to origin error is stored in order to set the action subject to a dead end state, and the process proceeds to S1130.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation frequency counter reaches the operation error determination number in S1113, the mode in which the operation target object is in a dead end state is exemplified. However, when the value of the non-detection operation count counter reaches the operation error determination count in S1113, the error handling is started and the error handling is executed, whereby the movable accessory initial operation is performed. When the process is interrupted, the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S76, and the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120, etc.) is not activated (operated) (dead end state). Good.

  In addition, when the operation target object is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal indicating that the movable accessory is operated ( For example, it is preferable to execute a process of invalidating reception of a detection signal (such as an effect button) or preventing the movable accessory from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter has not reached the operation error determination number, the driving of the movable accessory driving motor is stopped, the process returns to S1106, and the processes of S1106 to S1108 are performed again. Start non-detection operation control (operation control corresponding to the short initial operation control in the above embodiment) that moves the object to be operated to the origin position at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initial operation control). Then, the monitoring state of S1109 and S110 described above is entered.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S1110 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (non-detection operation) of repeatedly moving the operation target object to the origin position (initial position) is executed until the operation error determination count is reached. If the action subject is detected at the origin position (initial position) during this time, the process proceeds to S1130 without proceeding to S1114.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as “Y” in S1104 and the process proceeds to S1120, the detection operation number counter is set to 0, the detection operation process data is set (S1121a), and the detection operation process timer is set. The timer count is started (S1121b). As the timer count of the detection process timer, the number of signals output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized by the initialization process is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. This may be done by counting. Further, in the operation process data at the time of detection of the present modification, the minimum control speed (see FIGS. 50 and 51) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (second operation control) described later is used as the control speed for operating the operation. It is described (set).

  Next, the operating object is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the set detection-time operation process data (S1122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S1123). If the operation is not completed, the process returns to S1122, and the operation subject is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection.

  In this way, in the detection operation control, until the detection operation process data is completed, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data, that is, the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initials) At the lowest speed in the operation control), an operation of once leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning from the position away from the origin position (initial position) to the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 50). The position away from the origin position is a position in the vicinity of the origin position, that is, a position where the detected part of each movable accessory cannot be detected by each origin sensor, and is a predetermined position closer to the origin position than each effect position ( (Operating position at detection).

  If it is determined in S1123 that the set operation process data at the time of detection is completed, the driving of the movable accessory drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S1124, and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. In other words, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the action subject is located at the origin position (initial position).

  When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the operation subject is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S1130.

  On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation subject is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation frequency counter (S1126). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter at the time of detection after the addition has reached the non-startup error determination number (for example, 3) (S1127). If the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the number of times of non-startup error determination, the process proceeds to S1128 to store the origin return error of the action target object (S1128), and proceeds to S1130. In other words, when the operation target object is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the operation control at the time of detection, the operation control for actual operation confirmation to be described later is not executed for the operation object combination (the operation concerned) The origin return error is stored in order to set the target accessory to the dead end state, and the process proceeds to S1130.

  In the present modification, when the value of the detection operation count counter reaches the operation error determination count in S1127, the mode in which the operation target object is in a dead end state is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. There is no limitation, and when the value of the detection operation count counter reaches the operation error determination count in S1127, the error handling is started and the error handling is executed, whereby the movable accessory initial action processing is performed. By being interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S76, and the effect control board 12 may not be activated (operated) (dead end state).

  In addition, when the action target object is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, an effect) for operating the movable accessory. It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating reception of a detection signal of a button or the like, or preventing the movable accessory from operating even when the input signal is input.

  In S1130 that is executed when “N” is determined in S1102, “Y” is determined in S1109, or “Y” is determined in S1124, the movable object is still an operation target. It is determined whether or not there is a remaining movable combination, and when there is no remaining movable combination (specifically, when the operation target combination is the third movable combination 500), The processing shifts to processing for performing an actual operation checking operation shown in 49. On the other hand, if there are any remaining movable combinations, the process proceeds to S1131, and after specifying the movable combination to be operated next, the process returns to S1102, and the specified operation target combination is described above in S1102 and the subsequent steps. The process is executed in the same way.

  When S1131 is executed when the operation target combination is the first movable combination 300, the second movable combination 400 is identified as the operation target combination based on the setting data, and the operation target combination is determined. When S1131 is executed when is the second movable combination 400, the third movable combination 500 is specified as the operation subject combination based on the setting data.

  Next, the processing shown in FIG. 49 will be described. First, in S1200 shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the operation based on the set data, as in S1101 described above (movable accessory (confirmation target accessory). ) Is specified (S1200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a storage of the origin return error of the target accessory (S1201).

  If there is a storage of the origin return error of the subject to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S1220 without executing the processing from S1202 to S1210. By doing so, in this modified example, the operation control for actual operation confirmation is not performed for the movable accessory that has been determined as the origin return error in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control. .

  On the other hand, if there is no storage of the return-to-origin error of the confirmation target accessory, the process proceeds to S1202a, and whether or not the non-detection operation control is executed on the confirmation target accessory, that is, S1105 to S1113 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been executed. When the non-detection operation control is not executed, the actual operation corresponding to the object to be checked is used as process data for executing the actual operation check operation control according to the fact that the non-detection operation is not executed. The confirmation process data A is set, and the process proceeds to S1202d (S1202b). In addition, when non-detection operation control is executed, actual operation confirmation corresponding to the object to be checked is used as process data for executing actual operation check operation control in response to execution of non-detection operation control. Process data B is set, and the process proceeds to S1202d (S1202c).

  The actual operation confirmation process data A and the actual operation confirmation process data B in the present modification are process data for executing different actual operation confirmation operation control. In other words, the first movable combination 300, the second movable combination 400, and the third movable combination 500 in the present modification have the case where the non-detection operation control is executed and the case where the non-detection operation control is not executed ( The operation control for actual operation check that is different from that when the operation at the time of detection is executed) is executed.

  For example, the process data A for actual operation confirmation set when the non-detection operation control is executed is an operation control (for example, an operation control at detection (short initials) that moves the movable accessory at a shorter distance than the actual operation control. The operation control is the same as the operation control), and the actual operation confirmation process data B set when the non-detection operation control is not executed is, for example, a movable accessory. Any data may be used as long as the content of the operation control to be operated at the same distance as the actual operation control is set.

  Next, the timer count of the process timer for actual operation confirmation is started (S1202d). Then, in the set actual operation confirmation process data, the object to be confirmed is operated based on the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer (S1203), and the process data is It is determined whether or not the process data has been completed (S1204). If the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S1203, and the object to be confirmed corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer at that time. Operate based on the set control speed.

  As described above, until the actual operation check process data is completed, the object to be checked operates at the operation speed set in the actual operation check process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. By doing so, the operation speed of the object to be confirmed can be sequentially changed in time series, and the same acceleration or deceleration as the operation speed of the operation actually performed by the movable accessory can be performed in the production.

  If it is determined in step S1204 that the set process data for actual operation confirmation has been completed, the driving of the movable accessory driving motor is stopped, and is the target accessory an origin target accessory? It is determined whether or not (S1204a). If the target combination is not the origin detection target combination, that is, if the third movable combination 500, the process proceeds to S1220. On the other hand, if the target combination is an origin detection target combination, that is, if it is the first movable combination 300 or the second movable combination 400, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the operation It is determined (confirmed) whether or not the target accessory is located at the origin position (initial position) (S1205).

  If the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, if the object to be confirmed is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the object to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the above-described non-detection operation control is performed (see FIG. 48). Steps S1206 to S1213 are performed in order to place the target combination at the origin position (initial position).

  Specifically, after setting 0 in the non-detection operation number counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S1206), the actual operation check operation control (long initial operation control) is used as the control speed. A minimum control speed is set for operating the object to be operated at the same operation speed as the minimum speed (S1207). If the object to be confirmed is a driving device, for example, the object to be confirmed is the first movable object 300, The first movable accessory driving motor 303 starts to be driven in the direction of the origin position (initial position) (S1208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S1209).

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether the origin detection sensor is in a detection state and whether the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S1210, S1211).

  By driving a drive device (for example, the first movable accessory drive motor 303) of the target accessory in the direction of the origin position (initial position), the target accessory is positioned at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor detects When the state is reached, it is determined as “Y” in S1210, and the process proceeds to S1220. On the other hand, if the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the object to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S1212 Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S1212), and whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the non-startup error determination number (for example, 3) is determined. Determination is made (S1213).

  If the value of the non-detection operation count counter has reached the operation error determination count, the process proceeds to S1220. In this modified example, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S1213, an example of proceeding directly to S1220 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S1213, store the origin return error of the object to be checked and clear the origin return error storage in S1222 described later. Instead, the actual operation may not be executed after that for the subject to be confirmed. Alternatively, by starting error processing (for example, including error notification) and executing the error processing, the accessory initialization processing is interrupted, so that the production control main processing is interrupted without proceeding to S76. The production control board 12 may be in a state where it does not start (operate) (a dead end state).

  In addition, when the action target object is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, an effect) for operating the movable accessory. It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating reception of a detection signal of a button or the like, or preventing the movable accessory from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation count counter has not reached the operation error determination count, the process returns to S1207, and the processing of S1207, S1208, and S1209 is performed again, so that the subject to be checked is confirmed as the actual operation. The operation to move to the origin position (initial position) at the minimum speed in the operation control (long initial operation control) (non-detection operation) is started, and the monitoring state of S1210 and S1211 described above is entered.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S1211 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (non-detection operation) of repeatedly moving the target accessory to the origin position (initial position) is performed until the operation error determination count is reached. If the target combination is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the time, the process proceeds to S1220.

  In S1220 that is executed when “Y” is determined in S1201, “N” is determined in S1204a, “Y” is determined in S1205, or “Y” is determined in S1210. , It is determined whether there are any remaining movable actors that are not yet confirmed for operation confirmation, and if there are no remaining movable actors (specifically, If the object is the third movable accessory 500), the error record stored in S1114 or S1128 is cleared (S1222), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a remaining movable accessory Then, the process proceeds to S1221, and after identifying the movable combination whose operation is to be checked next, the process returns to S1201, and the above-described processing from S1201 is similarly executed on the identified target combination.

  Here, the operation mode and control contents of the movable combination by executing the movable combination initial operation process shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a schematic explanatory diagram illustrating operation modes of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 51A is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, FIG. 51B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the detection-time operation control, and FIG. 51C is the control speed in the non-detection-time operation control. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

  50 and 51, the non-detection operation control (origin return operation) and the detection operation control (short initial operation) in the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 that are the origin detection target actors. ) And actual operation confirmation operation control (long initial operation) will be described, and description of the third movable accessory 500 that is not the origin detection target accessory will be omitted. Further, the reciprocating distance (rotation range) of the first movable part 302 of the first movable accessory 300 is the same as the reciprocating distances (movement range) of the second movable parts 401 and 402 of the second movable accessory 400. However, for convenience of explanation, the same conceptual diagram is used for explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the first movable portion 302 of the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second movable accessory 400 are respectively the origin position (retracted position, initial position) and the effect position. The reciprocating operation from the origin position to the effect position and the return operation from the effect position to the origin position are actual operations that are actually performed in the above-described movable body effect or the like.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the movable object initial operation process is executed, if the detected part of the movable object is not detected by the origin detection sensor, that is, the movable object is detected for some reason (for example, transportation or amusement island) If the actuator has moved from the origin position at the time of installation, or if the origin return could not be performed during the previous operation (for example, when performing the production, the origin return of the movable accessory can be confirmed due to motor step-out, failure, catching, etc. If there is an object error (operation error) such as no operation or operation failure), or if the machine has moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the gaming machine, etc.) (for example, non-detection in FIG. 50) Non-detection operation to return to the origin when it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the production position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to hour operation control To run the control. When this non-detection operation control is executed, the movable accessory is at a position away from the origin position, and therefore, the only operation is to move the movable accessory in the direction of the origin position.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable accessory initial operation process, and the first movable portion 302 of the first movable accessory 300 and the detected portions of the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second movable accessory 400. Is detected by the origin detection sensor, operation control during detection is executed.

  For example, in order to ensure that the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period between the time when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor and the operation of the movable accessory in the direction of the origin position is restricted. When an operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may return and stop at a position that is further shifted away from the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control during detection for returning the movable accessory to the more accurate origin position is performed.

  In this detection operation, it is necessary to move the movable accessory to a position away from the origin position and then return to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state of the detected part by the origin detection sensor. Since there is no need to move, the movable accessory is moved from the origin position to the detection-time operation position in the vicinity of the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation (see FIGS. 55A and 55B).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the movable accessory initial operation process, and then executes actual operation confirmation operation control. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation that the movable accessory actually performs in various effects.

  Next, the control speeds set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. Note that the speeds shown in FIGS. 51A, 51B, and 51C are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate each movable accessory. This is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when a predetermined movable accessory is operated, even when the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, If the movement section is different (for example, a section with or without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down even in the same moving section, the movable accessory is actually operated. The operation speed in the case of being made may differ from the control speed. Also, even if the same control speed is set for a movable accessory, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable accessory, the actual operation of each movable accessory The speed is not necessarily the same. In the case where a plurality of movable accessories are operated by a stepping motor having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable accessory, the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, When there is a difference in the driving mechanism or the like, the actual operation speed of each movable accessory is not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (A), when executing the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The object to be confirmed is operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed such that after acceleration from the origin position, the vehicle is decelerated and stopped at the effect position, and after acceleration from the effect position is decelerated and stopped at the origin position. In the actual operation check operation control to confirm that each movable accessory can operate normally, the control speed of the movable accessory is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the production position. Let In other words, when performing the movable body effect of each movable accessory, the effect control CPU 120 has a minimum speed (low speed) as the first speed and a maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. Since control is performed so that each movable accessory operates at a speed within the range, even when the action control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed. Control is performed so that each movable accessory operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are actual operating speeds of the movable accessory, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following, when the movable accessory is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable accessory is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. Will be described.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed at the time of acceleration and deceleration of the movable accessory becomes the minimum speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the production position, the movable accessory is controlled by controlling to be the lowest speed in the action control for actual operation over a longer time than when stopping at the production position. The detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor after the vehicle is decelerated reliably.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (B), when performing the operation control at the time of detection, the CPU 120 for effect control always confirms the actual operation in the period for moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period for moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable accessory is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the actual operation check). In order to achieve the same speed as the minimum speed in the operation control for operation), the control is performed so that the movable accessory is operated based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  In the case of detection operation control, the moving distance of the movable accessory is shorter than that of the actual operation check operation control. Because there is a possibility that the detected part cannot be detected reliably by the detection sensor, or the movable accessory etc. may be damaged by an impact when the movable accessory returns to the origin position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Control to operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51C, the effect control CPU 120, when the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control, from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. During the movement period, control is performed so that the operation is always performed at the minimum speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the example, the movable accessory is always operated based on the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation so that it becomes the same speed as the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation). To control.

  In this case, since it is unclear how far the movable accessory is from the origin position, if the movable accessory is located in the vicinity of the origin position, When operating at a high control speed, that is, at a high speed, when the movable accessory returns to the origin position, the detected part cannot be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, or the movable accessory returns to the origin position from a short distance. Since there is a possibility that the movable accessory or the like may be damaged due to an impact when the movement is restricted, control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  As described above, in the present modification, when performing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the effect control CPU 120 has the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation control. Based on this, control is performed so that the movable accessory always operates at a single (constant) operation speed. Since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the action control for actual operation confirmation corresponding to each movable accessory, and are not the operation speeds common to each movable accessory, the minimum speeds in each movable accessory may be different. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable portion 302 of the first movable combination 300 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second movable combination 400 have a size, a weight, Since the operation mode, the operation distance, and the drive mechanism including the drive motor are different, the actual operation speed of the movable accessory is different even when the same control speed is set. Even when different control speeds are set for each movable accessory, the actual operation speed of the movable accessory is different. As described above, the minimum speed is an operation speed based on the control speed set for each movable accessory, and is controlled so as to operate at the minimum speed optimum for the movable accessory. It is possible to reliably detect the accessory at the origin position.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the present invention, the first movable portion 302 is tilted sideways at the first retraction position (see FIG. 52A) and at a position away from the first retraction. On the side of the first movable accessory 300 provided to be rotatable with respect to the first effect position (see FIG. 52B) where the first movable portion 302 stands vertically, or on the side of the image display device 5. A second retraction position (origin position, initial position, see FIG. 53A) for retraction and a second effect position (see FIG. 53) that is arranged at a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the image display device 5 and is away from the second retraction position. 53 (B)), a first movable accessory driving motor 303 as a driving means for operating the movable accessory, and a second movable accessory. Object driving motors 411 and 421, the first movable accessory driving motor 303 and the first And an effect control CPU 120 as a control means for controlling the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory driving motors 411 and 421. The effect control CPU 120 performs non-detection operation control and detection operation as the first operation control. Action control, action control for actual action confirmation as second action control for confirming that the movable accessory can operate normally, and third action control for performing a movable body effect by the movable accessory, When the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the first speed is within the range of the minimum speed (low speed) and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. When the control is performed so that the movable accessory operates in a mode according to the mode in the first motion control at the speed, and the non-detection motion control or the detection motion control is executed, the actual motion confirmation as the second motion control is performed. In motion control Controls such that the movable won game at a low speed following speed operation.

  By doing in this way, suitable 2nd operation control can be performed. Specifically, in the second motion control, when the non-detection motion control as the first motion control is executed, the movable accessory is detected based on the actual motion check process data A in the second motion control. If the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is not executed as the first operation control, the movable accessory is operated based on the actual operation confirmation process data B in the second operation control. To control. That is, when the movable accessory performs the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, part of the operation in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control is omitted as compared with the case where the movable accessory does not perform the operation control ( Therefore, only necessary control can be executed.

  In the first operation control, the movable accessory operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, and thus can be safely positioned at the origin position. Specifically, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the distance to move the movable accessory to the origin position may be shorter than in the actual operation confirmation operation control. By setting the maximum speed in hourly operation control to the minimum speed in action control for actual operation confirmation, the detected part can be reliably detected by the detection means, and the movement restriction is performed while moving the movable accessory at high speed. It is possible to avoid damage due to the impact applied.

  In addition, when performing non-detection operation control or detection operation control, when controlling the movable accessory to operate at a speed lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, non-detection operation control or detection The control speed set when executing the hourly operation control and the minimum control speed set in the action control for actual operation confirmation may be the same control speed or different control speeds.

  In addition, when performing the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 always has a preset single (constant) operation speed, that is, always the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Then, the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 are controlled to operate.

  By doing in this way, the speed at the time of positioning the 1st movable combination 300 or the 2nd movable combination 400 in an origin position can be made constant, and the 1st movable combination 300 or the 2nd movable combination 400 is obtained. Can be prevented.

  Further, when executing the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first movable object 300 and the second movable combination at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. The object 400 is controlled to operate.

  By doing so, the speed is excessively decreased while ensuring the safe operation of the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 (for example, a speed slower than the minimum speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation) By selecting the maximum speed (first speed) that can be operated safely without the need to perform the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control period, the period can be shortened.

  Also, a first movable accessory origin detection sensor 316 and a second movable accessory origin detection sensor as detection means capable of detecting that the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 are located at the origin position. 440A and 440B, and the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control in S1105 to S1114 when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in S104 in the movable accessory initial operation process, and detects the origin in S1104. When the sensor is in the detection state, the operation control at the time of detection of S1120 to S1128 is executed, and when the operation control at the time of non-detection is executed, the movable accessory is controlled to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control at the time of detection.

  By doing in this way, the presence or absence of the malfunction of the 1st movable accessory origin detection sensor 316 and the 2nd movable accessory origin detection sensors 440A and 440B can be grasped by non-detection operation control or detection operation control. . In addition, when performing non-detection operation control, it is unclear whether the movable accessory is close to the origin position, while when performing detection operation control, the movable accessory is at the origin position. Therefore, the operation control at the time of detection may be performed at a speed faster than the operation control at the time of non-detection, which is lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  Further, the production control CPU 120 determines that the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S109 in the second initialization process when a specific abnormality (for example, an operation abnormality that occurred during execution of the production) has occurred. The first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 are controlled to move toward the origin position at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control until the operation error determination count reaches “3”. .

  By doing in this way, even in the operation at the time of abnormality that is executed when a specific abnormality (for example, an error such as an operation abnormality that occurred during the performance) has occurred, the first movable accessory 300 and the second The movable accessory 400 can be operated safely. Specifically, for example, when an operation abnormality occurs during the performance, when the second initialization process is subsequently performed, the movable accessory has not returned to the origin position, and therefore the non-detection operation control is performed. Will be executed. In addition, when an operation abnormality occurs, it is considered that the movable accessory does not operate even in the second initialization process. Therefore, as the operation at the time of abnormality, the first movable accessory 300 or the Control is performed so that the second movable accessory 400 moves toward the origin position.

  Further, when there is an origin return error storage of the target accessory in S1201 in the movable accessory initial operation process, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to S1220 and does not perform the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 from being stopped at positions other than the origin position during the actual operation confirmation operation control due to an abnormality. Specifically, for example, if an operation abnormality occurs during the performance, it is considered that the movable accessory does not operate even in the second initialization process. However, it is preferable not to execute the actual operation check operation control because a load is only applied to the driving means.

  In addition, the first movable combination 300 and the second movable combination 400 as the first movable combination and the third movable combination 500 as the second movable combination as the movable combination, the production control CPU 120, When it is determined in step S1102 in the second initialization process that the movable accessory is an origin detection target accessory that needs to be detected at the origin, the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the movable accessory is not an origin detection target accessory that requires origin detection, the process proceeds to step S1130 to perform non-detection operation control and detection operation control. Absent.

  By doing this, it is possible to perform the actual motion check operation control only for the necessary movable accessory, and it is possible to shorten the operation check time by the actual motion check operation control.

  In addition, the first movable combination 300 and the second movable combination 400 as the first movable combination and the third movable combination 500 as the second movable combination as the movable combination, the production control CPU 120, When non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation of each of the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 is executed, the first movable accessory 300 is movable at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. The control is performed so that the combination is operated, and the operation speed of the actual operation confirmation operation control is made different between the first movable combination 300 and the second movable combination 400.

  By doing in this way, the period of non-detection operation control and detection operation control can be shortened, ensuring the safe operation | movement of each movable accessory by the operation speed according to each movable accessory. For example, even if the same control speed is set in the actual motion check operation control in the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400, the size, weight, operation mode, and operation distance of each movable accessory are set. When there is a difference in the drive mechanism or the like, the actual operation speed of each movable accessory when the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control are executed is different.

  Specifically, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, even when the same control speed (the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control) is set, The actual operation speed of the movable combination having a large weight is slower than the actual operation speed of the movable combination having a small weight. Further, when the movable accessory is raised, the actual operation speed is slower than when the movable accessory is lowered. In addition, when a spring or the like that biases the movable part in the effect direction is provided as the drive mechanism, when the spring is contracted and moved in a direction against the biasing force, the biasing force is in a state where the spring is extended. The actual operation speed is slower than when moving in a direction against the above. Thus, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, when controlling the movable combination so that the movable combination operates at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, In consideration of size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., it is preferable to set an individual minimum control speed in each operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  For example, the first movable part and the second movable part are arranged in front and back so that the second movable part overlaps the front side of the first movable part when viewed from the player when moving toward the origin position. In the case of performing any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control, when performing the operation control of both the first movable unit and the second movable unit together, It is preferable to control the operation speed (minimum speed) of the first movable part and the second movable part to be different. By doing so, the power is turned on in a state where the first movable part and the second movable part have moved to positions away from the origin position for some reason, and in the second initialization process of S51 When the non-detection operation control of both the first movable part and the second movable part is performed together, the operation speed (minimum speed) of both the first movable part and the second movable part is controlled to be the same. Then, although the situation in which the first movable part is hidden by the second movable part and moves to the origin position becomes difficult to see, the first movable part and the second movable part are controlled so that the minimum speeds are different from each other. Since the movable part and the second movable part move when moving, it becomes easy to confirm the origin return operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

  Further, even when the first movable part and the second movable part larger (or longer) than the first movable part are included, the operation speed (minimum speed) of the first movable part and the second movable part is different. It is preferable to control. In this way, for example, the minimum in any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control of the first movable unit which is smaller (or shorter) than the second movable unit and is not noticeable. Since the speed is larger (or longer) than that of the first movable part, it is made slower than the minimum speed in any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control of the second movable part that stands out. It becomes easy to confirm the operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

  As described above, when the first movable portion and the second movable portion different from the first movable portion are provided, the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation of the first movable portion and the second movable portion, respectively. It is preferable to control so that the operation speed (minimum speed) in the operation control for operation confirmation is different. In addition, when controlling so that the operation speed (minimum speed) of the 1st movable part and the 2nd movable part differs in this way, operation control at the time of non-detection and operation control at the time of detection of each of the 1st movable part and the 2nd movable part And the minimum control speed set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation may be different or the same.

  In this modification, as an example of the movable combination, the first movable combination 300 that can be rotated between the origin position and the production position and the second that can be linearly moved between the origin position and the production position. Although the form which applied the movable combination 400 and the 3rd movable combination 500 which can be rotated centering on a rotating shaft was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The operation | movement aspect of these movable combinations (For example, the moving direction and the rotating direction) and the number of installations are not limited to those described above, and can be variously changed. Moreover, you may apply the movable accessory which operate | moves with an operation | movement aspect other than the above.

  Further, in the present modification, the first movable accessory 300 and the second movable accessory 400 that are operable between the origin position and the effect position are applied as the origin target feature, and the third movable feature is used as the origin non-target feature. Although the form to which the accessory 500 is applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a movable accessory such as the third movable accessory 500 that does not operate between the origin position and the production position, The origin target character may be set by setting the origin position at the rotational position of the third movable portion 502.

  Further, in the present modification, in the movable accessory initial operation process, the mode of performing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control for one movable accessory is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least only non-detection operation control may be executed. When only non-detection operation control can be executed, the non-detection operation control does not have to be executed when the movable combination is detected by the origin detection sensor in the movable combination initial operation processing.

  Further, in this modification, when the production control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the production control CPU 120 performs the actual operation confirmation as the second operation control. Although an example in which the movable accessory is controlled to operate at the same speed as the minimum speed in the operation control is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, It is only necessary to control the movable accessory to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the two-operation control. For example, it is movable at an operation speed slower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation You may control so that an accessory may operate | move.

  Further, in this modification, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control that is the first operation control, it is always movable at a preset single operation speed (the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control). The mode is illustrated in which the accessory is operated, that is, the movable accessory is controlled to always operate at a constant speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when returning to the origin position. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the operation is performed at a speed lower than the minimum speed by gradually decelerating from the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. In other words, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control that is the first operation control, if the speed is lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, the speed is varied in a predetermined movement period. Also good.

  Further, in this modification, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control that is the first operation control, the operation of the movable accessory is performed at the same operation speed (the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Although the form to control was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control is controlled to be equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the detection operation control. For example, the movable accessory may be operated at different operation speeds in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control.

  Further, in this modified example, when a specific abnormality such as an error has occurred, when the movable accessory is not detected by the detection means, that is, the origin detection sensor detects in step S109 in the second initialization process. If the state is not in the state, the first movable accessory 300 or the second movable accessory 400 is moved toward the origin position at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control until the operation error determination count reaches “3”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The speed is lower than the minimum speed in the operation control at the time of detection, for example, at a low speed that is set for an error and can obtain a relatively large torque. The movable accessory may be controlled to operate at a certain special speed.

  Further, in this modification, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in S1124 in the movable accessory initial operation process, that is, when the operation subject accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position). The processes of S1122 to S1127 are repeated until the origin detection sensor enters the detection state, that is, based on the set process data, based on the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation control, the movable accessory However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in S1124 in the movable accessory initial operation process, the operation is started from that point. The non-detection operation is performed to move the movable accessory toward the home position based on the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation. It may be.

  Further, in the present modification, the first movable combination 300, the second movable combination 400, and the third movable combination 500 are provided as the plurality of movable combinations, and in the second initialization process, non-detection operation control, Although the first movable combination 300, the second movable combination 400, and the third movable combination 500 have been exemplified as the movable combination as the execution target of the detection-time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control, The present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object to be subjected to the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control in the second initialization process is the first movable combination. The movable object is not limited to one object such as the object 300, the second movable object 400, and the third movable object 500, but includes, for example, a plurality of movable parts that can operate the one movable object ( For example, the second movable accessory 400 and the second movable part 401 are second movable. 402), each of these movable parts is set as an execution target of non-detection operation control, detection-time operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control, and each movable part is sequentially non-detection-time operation control and detection-time operation control. The actual operation confirmation operation control may be performed.

  Further, in this modification, in the action control for actual operation confirmation in the movable accessory initial action process, the effect control CPU 120 accelerates and decelerates the movable accessory in each of the forward operation and the backward operation, and low speed → high speed → low speed. → The mode of controlling to stop is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation speed in the motion control for the movable body effect and the motion control for the actual motion check is controlled to the above-described mode. For example, it may be controlled to repeat a low speed and a high speed multiple times such as low speed → high speed → low speed → high speed → low speed → stop, and the operation speed changes in the order of low speed → medium speed → high speed. You may control to do.

  Further, control may be performed so that the change mode and the minimum speed of the operation speed are different between the forward operation and the reverse operation. If the minimum speed is different between forward operation and reverse operation, the maximum speed in non-detection operation control or detection operation control is set to the lower speed of forward operation and reverse operation in actual operation check operation control. What is necessary is just to set so that it may become the speed below the minimum speed.

  In the present modification, in the operation control for confirming the actual operation in the movable accessory initial operation process, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change the operation speed by accelerating and decelerating the movable accessory. The present invention is not limited to this, and the movable accessory may be controlled to operate at a single operation speed. In this way, when the movable accessory is controlled to operate at a single operation speed, the single operation speed is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. What is necessary is just to set the maximum speed in hour operation control so that it may become the speed below this minimum speed.

  Further, in the present modification, the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control as the first operation control are exemplified in the movable accessory initial operation process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. Is not limited to this, for example, it may be after error processing including an accessory error or other various errors, at the start of symbol variation, or after execution of a movable accessory effect, It may be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Further, in the present modification, the non-detection operation control in the order of the first movable combination 300 → the second movable combination 400 → the third movable combination 500 is performed as the movable combination order data in the movable combination initial operation process. Although the mode in which the operation control at the time of detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the order is arbitrary, and each operation is executed in an order other than the above. It may be. Further, any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control for two or more movable objects out of the plurality may be executed together in parallel.

  In addition, although an example in which the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed after performing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control for all the movable accessories is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, After performing non-detection operation control or detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control of one movable accessory, other non-detection operation control or detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control are performed. You may make it perform.

  Further, in this modification, the actual operation confirmation process data is exemplified by a description in which the same operation content as the actual production operation is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the operation control for actual operation confirmation, as long as all the operations of the operation speed in the actual performance are included, the operation may not be completely the same, for example, a plurality of performance operations in which some of the operations are different. If there is, it may be the process data for actual operation confirmation describing the operation exclusively for confirmation incorporating all of the plurality of different rendering operations.

  Further, in this modification, the mode in which the number of operation error determinations in S1113, S1127, and S1213 is “3” is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of operation error determinations is “3”. ”May be set as appropriate, and the number of operation error determinations in S1113, S1127, and S1213 may be different.

  Further, in this modification, the mode in which the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed in the movable accessory initial operation process is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Rather, for example, the execution timing of the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control can be arbitrarily set, for example, after the end of the movable body effect, when the symbol variation display is started, It may be executed when it is executed.

  (1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1), and a movable accessory (for example, FIG. To return the origin to the origin position of the rotating mechanism 173A of the movable accessory 173, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C, and the lifting mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175, etc. The operation (for example, the operation of returning to the origin position where the operation is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIGS. 42 to 45) is performed, and the mode of the return operation (for example, the rotation mechanism in FIG. 42 or FIG. 43). An aspect in which 173A does not perform an origin return operation and an aspect in which the rotation mechanism 173A performs an origin return operation in Fig. 44 or 45. In addition, in Fig. 42 or Fig. 44, the opening / closing mechanism 1 3B does not perform the origin return operation, and the mode according to the mode in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation in FIG. 43 or FIG. 45 (for example, in FIGS. 42 to 45, the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism The initial state of the movable accessory is such that the initial operation is not performed when 173B performs the origin return operation, or the initial operation is performed when the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the origin return operation. Although a gaming machine that can execute a suitable initial operation by performing an operation (for example, a short initial operation shown in FIGS. 42 to 45) (for example, including a mode that does not perform the initial operation shown in FIG. 45), The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in this embodiment, when performing an origin return operation for returning the movable accessory to the origin position, the initial operation (second operation control) is not performed (pattern A below), and the origin return operation is not performed. The case where short initial is performed (the following pattern F) is exemplified, but in the initial operation, the combination patterns of the movable member origin return operation mode and the initial operation mode are the following patterns A to H. Also good.
Pattern A Home return operation + No initial operation Pattern B Home return operation + Short initial operation Pattern C Home return operation + Short initial operation + Long initial operation Pattern D Home return operation + Long initial operation Pattern E No home return operation + No initial operation Pattern F No homing operation + short initial operation Pattern G No homing operation + short initial operation + long initial operation Pattern H No homing operation + long initial operation

  In addition, as shown in the pattern A and the pattern E, the operation mode of the initial operation may include one that does not perform the initial operation. Moreover, in the above pattern, the origin return operation, the short initial operation, and the long initial operation have been described separately, but for example, the origin return operation includes a short initial operation. Also good. That is, the operation mode of the long initial operation may be executed according to the operation mode of the origin return operation including the short initial.

  In the above embodiment, when the origin sensor is in the on state, the origin return operation control is not executed, so the short initial operation control is executed, and when the origin sensor is in the off state, the origin return operation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second operation control, the movable body is in a mode corresponding to the mode in the first operation control. For example, even when the origin return operation control is executed, the short-circuit as the second operation control is performed according to the distance (mode) operated for the origin return. Determines whether or not to execute the initial motion control, and the distance, motion period, motion type, motion for moving the movable accessory in the short initial motion control It may be changed aspects such as like, and the like.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which performs 1st operation control and 2nd operation control of the some movable accessory 173,175 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, A modified example As described above, after performing the first operation control and the second operation control of one of the plurality of movable accessories, the first operation control and the second operation control of the other movable combination are performed. Also good.

  The patterns A to H may be used in the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. For example, different patterns may be used for the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. Further, the same pattern may be used in the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. In addition, the pattern used in the initial operation at power-on and the initial operation during the demonstration may be a predetermined pattern, or one pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns according to a predetermined condition. It may be a thing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the short initial operation is performed by one operation is illustrated, but the short initial operation may be performed by selecting an operation mode from a plurality of operation modes. For example, a predetermined operation mode may be selected from a plurality of operation modes according to the mode of the origin return operation. The predetermined operation mode of the short initial is different in the production mode such as the moving distance, the moving speed, the number of times of movement, the operating time, the sound effect output from the speaker 8 and the lighting pattern of the lamp 9. There may be.

  Similarly, in the present embodiment, the case where the long initial operation performs one operation is illustrated, but the long initial operation may be performed by selecting an operation mode from a plurality of operation modes. For example, a predetermined operation mode may be selected from a plurality of operation modes according to the mode of the origin return operation or the mode of the short initial operation.

  Furthermore, in the initial operation pattern that is executed by combining the short initial operation and the long initial operation, the short initial operation and the long initial operation are performed by selecting a combination of operation modes from a plurality of operation mode combinations. Also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the initial operation is performed at the time of power-on and during the demonstration is illustrated, but the initial operation may be performed at other timing. For example, the initial operation may be a timing when the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition. The timing that satisfies the predetermined condition is, for example, a timing that is not limited to during the demonstration, and may be when a predetermined time has elapsed after the suspension of fluctuation. The predetermined time after the fluctuation stop may be, for example, one hour after the fluctuation stop. Further, the predetermined time after the fluctuation stop may be immediately after the fluctuation stop. Moreover, the timing which satisfy | fills a predetermined condition may be after a fluctuation | variation start. The timing that satisfies the predetermined condition may be, for example, a timing immediately after the start of fluctuation. Moreover, it may be just before the super reach production etc. is performed after the fluctuation start.

  The initial operation may be executed at an arbitrary timing when a player or hall clerk performs a predetermined operation.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, when the movable accessory is at the origin position before the return operation (for example, the origin sensor 171A shown in FIG. 35 or the origin sensor 171B shown in FIG. 36 is (For example, when it is in an on state) that performs the initial operation of the movable accessory (for example, the rotation mechanism 173A shown in FIG. 42 is operated in (3) and (6), and the opening / closing mechanism 173B is (4 ) And (5) may be an initial operation, etc., and according to such a gaming machine, even in the case of a movable accessory at the origin position from the beginning, the operation can be confirmed in the initial operation. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), the movable accessory that has performed the return operation does not perform the initial operation (for example, the operation (2) shown in FIG. 45 was performed). The rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B that performed the operation of (1) may not perform an initial operation). According to such a gaming machine, by suppressing the time required for the operation check Although a case where a suitable initial operation can be executed has been illustrated, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  (4) Further, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the movable accessory that has performed the return operation (for example, the rotating mechanism that has performed the return operation (1) in FIG. 44). 173A and the like (for example, the operations (4) and (7) of the rotation mechanism 173A in FIG. 44) are the initial operations (for example, the opening and closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 44). (5) and (6), etc.), and according to such a gaming machine, a case where a suitable initial operation according to the situation can be executed is illustrated. The gaming machine according to is not limited to this.

  (5) Further, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), after performing the initial operation, the movable accessory confirmation operation corresponding to the rendering operation (for example, shown in FIGS. 38 to 41) , A rotary mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B or a slide mechanism 173C of the movable accessory 173, and a long initial operation of the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175). For example, the case where the confirmation operation can be suitably confirmed by confirming the operation of the movable accessory by the short initial operation before confirming the production operation by the long initial operation is illustrated. The gaming machine is not limited to this.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the return operation is performed when the power is turned on (for example, the movable role of S151 executed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 27). This is performed at a timing other than when the product initial operation process is executed (for example, the timing at which the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014 executed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 31 is executed). However, according to such a gaming machine, there has been an example in which the chance of confirming the malfunction of the movable accessory is increased and the malfunction of the production operation can be suppressed. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the initial operation is a combination of a plurality of operations (for example, the slide mechanism 173C controlled by the effect control CPU 120, 46. (4) to (6) left-right direction sliding operation shown in FIG. 46, etc., which is a mixture of the left-side sliding operation (2) and (3) shown in FIG. 39 and the right-side sliding operation shown in FIG. Well, according to such a gaming machine, a case where a suitable initial operation can be executed by suppressing the time required for confirming a plurality of operations of the movable accessory has been illustrated, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is It is not limited to this.

  Further, the program and data for realizing the present embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, You may take the form distributed by pre-installing in storage devices, such as a computer apparatus. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  In addition, the game execution form is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the change is started, in order to notify the change control pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream to the effect control microcomputer, Although the example of transmitting the variation pattern designation command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. (2) Before the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called second in the case where the reach is reached (such as the reach type, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after a stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the “ratio” is, for example, a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. This includes the case where the ratios are different due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one is assigned 100% and the other is assigned 0%).

  Further, the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like do not depart from the spirit of the present invention. Thus, changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid gaming ball into the gaming area to play a game. A game score for use in a game is given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a member card, and a given game score or game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a game score given by winning a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game machine using a game medium is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine is shown that is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is ended based on the determination of the probable big hit, but it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration shown in each of the above embodiments can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  In addition, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, a variable display means for performing a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, and deriving and displaying a display result, A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means, but the game score is used when the game score is not 0. The game ball enclosed in the plane is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game ball is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that add points. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which launches a game ball from the downward direction rather than a game area | region with the hitting ball launcher was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, For example, the said hitting ball launcher is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The game ball may be launched from a position above the game area by providing it at a position above the game area.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the start prize opening two into the 1st start prize opening and the 2nd start prize opening is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, A start prize opening It is good also as one, and it is good also as a start winning opening 3 or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two types, the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure, is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is included. The special symbol may be 3 or more.

  In the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols that can each be identified and derives and displays a definite special symbol that is a variable display result is shown. However, the present invention is limited to such gaming machines. Not. For example, the varying special symbol may be different from the confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as the variation display result. In other words, the fixed special symbols derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of special symbols that fluctuate.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine that performs a variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified and derives and displays a determined effect symbol that is a variable display result is shown. However, the present invention is limited to such a gaming machine. Not. For example, the changing effect design may be different from the determined effect design derived and displayed as the change display result. In other words, the determined effect symbols derived and displayed as the variation display result may not be included in the varying types of effect symbols.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game (game) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention can also be applied to (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus)).

  For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and is a movable accessory that performs an operation (for example, a movable accessory provided in the slot machine. It is stored in the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen provided in the machine, and when specified (for example, during production), the movable position that moves to the front of the liquid crystal screen is stored at the origin position (for example, in the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen in the above-described normal state). In the case of a movable accessory that moves to the front of the liquid crystal screen at a specific time, a slot machine that performs a return operation to return to the storage position and the like and performs an initial operation of the movable accessory in a manner according to the mode of the return operation. It may be.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 5 ... Image display apparatus 103 ... CPU
120 ... CPU for effect control
173A Rotating mechanism 173B Opening / closing mechanism 173C Slide mechanism 173D Elevating mechanism 300 ... First movable accessory 400 ... Second movable accessory 500 ... Third movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A movable body provided to be operable between an origin position and a position away from the origin position;
Driving means for operating the movable body;
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the driving means;
With
The control means includes
First operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position, second operation control for confirming that the movable body can operate normally, and first for performing an effect by the movable body 3 operation control is possible,
In the second operation control, the movable body is operated in a mode corresponding to the operation mode in the first operation control within a range of a first speed and a second speed higher than the first speed. Control
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control.

Images